2012 Honda Insight

2012 Insight
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
© 2011 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved P/N 00X31-TM8-6200
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered a

permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS This owner’s manual covers all models of the

STREET Insight. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE Images throughout this owner’s manual
V. I. N. (including the front cover) represent features
and equipment that are available on some,
DELIVERY DATE but not all, models. Your particular model
(Date sold to original retail purchaser) may not have some of these features.
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. The information and specifications included

in this publication were in effect at the time
ADDRESS of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
STREET Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/ incurring any obligation whatsoever.
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2012 Honda Insight was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in

the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
Introduction
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the
permission of the vehicle owner.
ii
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iii
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 59
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and other convenience items) ............. 163
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 245
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 263
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 299
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 349
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 379
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 395
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 399
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
INDEX
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page
1
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- Relations
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load (U.S. and Canada only)
luggage and other cargo. A summary of the warranties
Your Vehicle at a Glance covering your new vehicle, and how
A quick reference to the main Driving to contact us for any reason. Refer to
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, your warranty manual for detailed
shift the transmission, and park. information.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the Maintenance Authorized Manuals
proper use and care of your vehicle’s The Maintenance MinderTM shows (U.S. only)
seat belts, an overview of the you when you need to take your How to order manuals and other
supplemental restraint system, and vehicle to the dealer for maintenance technical literature.
valuable information on how to service. There is also a list of things
protect children with child restraints. to check and instructions on how to Index
check them.
Instruments and Controls Service Information Summary
Explains the purpose of each Taking Care of the Unexpected A summary of the information you
instrument panel indicator and gauge, This section covers several problems need when you pull up to the fuel
the multi-information display, and motorists sometimes experience, pump.
how to use the controls on the and details how to handle them.
dashboard and steering column.
Technical Information
Features ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
How to operate the climate control and technical information.
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
2
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.62) MULTI-INFORMATION HAZARD WARNING NAVIGATION SYSTEM＊2

DISPLAY (P.72, 75) BUTTON(P.125) AUDIO SYSTEM (P.170)

GAUGES (P.72)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

(P.10)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.147) PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P.10)
ECON BUTTON
(P.127)
CLIMATE CONTROL
DOOR LOCK TAB SYSTEM
(P.133) (P.164)
POWER DOOR LOCK

MASTER SWITCH
(P.133) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
POWER WINDOW (CVT)
SWITCHES (P.273)
(P.149)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.250) PADDLE SHIFTERS＊1 USB ADAPTER CABLE＊1
(P.278) (P.199, 207)
EX model with navigation system is shown.
＊1 : If equipped
＊2 : Refer to the navigation system manual. CONTINUED
3
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS＊2 (P.224)
(P.73) BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB WIPERS/WASHERS MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS＊2 (P.76)
(P.124) (P.119)
HEADLIGHTS/ HORN＊1
TURN SIGNALS
(P.120)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM＊3/
AUDIO SYSTEM
REMOTE AUDIO (P.170)
CONTROL BUTTONS＊2
(P.219)
VEHICLE STABILITY PASSENGER AIRBAG

ASSIST (VSA) OFF OFF INDICATOR
SWITCH (P.35)
(P.296)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE HEATED MIRROR＊2
CONTROL BUTTONS＊3 (P.126/148)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK (P.157)
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS＊2 (P.227)
STEERING WHEEL MULTI-INFORMATION AUXILIARY INPUT JACK＊2
ADJUSTMENTS (P.128) BUTTONS＊2 (P.76) (P.220)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
This section gives you important Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Your Seat Belts ........................ 21 Back Seat .................................. 39
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 21 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 39

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 23 Children .................................... 41
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 24 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 41
Your Airbags ............................ 25 Additional Safety Precautions .... 42
Airbag System Components ....... 25 Protecting Infants and Small
How Your Front Airbags Children .................................... 43
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Work.......................................... 28 Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 8 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32 Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Seat Belts ........................................ 9 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Airbags .......................................... 10 Work.......................................... 33 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34 With LATCH ................................ 47
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 12 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 14 Indicator Works ....................... 34 With a Tether ............................... 51
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 15 How the Passenger Airbag Off Protecting Larger Children ............ 52
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16 Indicator Works ....................... 35 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 52
5. Fasten and Position the Airbag Service .............................. 36 Using a Booster Seat ................... 53
Seat Belts .............................. 17 Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children−General Front .......................................... 54
Position ................................. 18 Guidelines ................................. 38 Additional Safety Precautions .... 55
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20 Restrained ................................ 38 Safety Labels .................................... 57
5
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Always Wear Your Seat Belt Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
recommendations throughout this A seat belt is your best protection in While airbags can save lives, they
section, and throughout this manual. all types of collisions. Airbags are can cause serious or fatal injuries to
The recommendations on this page designed to supplement seat belts, occupants who sit too close to them,
are the ones we consider to be the not replace them. So even though or are not properly restrained.
most important. your vehicle is equipped with airbags, Infants, young children, and short
make sure you and your passengers adults are at the greatest risk. Be
always wear your seat belts, and sure to follow all instructions and
wear them properly (see page 17 ). warnings in this manual.
Restrain All Children Don’t Drink and Drive

Children age 12 and under should Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
ride properly restrained in a back one drink can reduce your ability to
seat, not the front seat. Infants and respond to changing conditions, and
small children should be restrained your reaction time gets worse with
in a child seat. Larger children every additional drink. So don’t drink
should use a booster seat and a lap/ and drive, and don’t let your friends
shoulder belt until they can use the drink and drive, either.
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 38 − 55 ).
6
Important Safety Precautions
Pay Appropriate Attention to the Keep Your Vehicle in Safe

Task of Driving Safely Condition
Engaging in mobile phone Having a tire blowout or a
conversation or other activities that mechanical failure can be extremely

keep you from paying close attention hazardous. To reduce the possibility
to the road, other vehicles and of such problems, check your tire
pedestrians could lead to a crash. pressures and condition frequently,
Remember, situations can change and perform all regularly scheduled
quickly, and only you can decide maintenance (see page 340 ).
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Control Your Speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
7
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(9) (12) (3) features that work together to
(6) (9) protect you and your passengers
(8) during a crash.
(4)
(10) Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
(8) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
(10) compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
(11) seat belts in a crash.
(7) However, you and your passengers
(1) Safety Cage can’t take full advantage of these
(2) Crush Zones features unless you remain sitting in
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(5) (7) (4) Head Restraints the correct position and always wear
(5) Collapsible Steering Column your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(6) Seat Belts features can contribute to injuries if
(7) Front Airbags they are not used properly.
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks The following pages explain how you
(2) (2) (11) Seat Belt Tensioners can take an active role in protecting
(1) (12) Occupant Position Detection yourself and your passengers.
System (OPDS) Sensor
8
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious

Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all − side impacts Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces and territories − rear impacts make sure you wear it properly.
require you to wear seat belts. − rollovers
9
Airbags
Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 32 for more seating positions during a moderate
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags to severe side or front impact (see
28 for more information on how work). page 33 for more information on how
your front airbags work). your side curtain airbags work).
10
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while

They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
collisions, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
11
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction 1.Close and Lock the Doors

The following pages provide After everyone has entered the
instructions on how to properly vehicle, be sure the doors and the
protect the driver, adult passengers, hatch are closed and locked.
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive Your vehicle has a door/
or ride in the front. hatch open indicator (red)
on the instrument panel to indicate
See pages 38 − 55 for important when any door or the hatch is not
guidelines on how to properly tightly closed.
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your See page 133 for how to lock the
vehicle. doors, and page 68 for how the door/
hatch open indicator works. You will also hear a beep when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
Your vehicle also has a door and (II) position, and each time you open
hatch open indicator on the multi- any door or the hatch with the key in
information display to indicate when the ON (II) position.
a specific door or the hatch is not
tightly closed. You will see the The above illustration shows that all
appropriate indicator(s) for each doors and the hatch are open.
condition.
12
Locking the doors reduces the

chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from

accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors and the hatch also

helps prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door or the
hatch when you come to a stop.
Your vehicle has the auto door

When the hatch is not tightly closed, When one or more doors or the locking/unlocking feature. For more
this indicator will come on. hatch are not tightly closed, the information, see page 108 .
corresponding indicator for each
condition will come on.
The above example shows the front

right and rear left doors, and the
hatch open.
13
2.Adjust the Front Seats If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure it
steering wheel up and down, and in is locked in position.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the and out (see page 128 ).
rear as possible while allowing you to See page 141 for how to adjust the
maintain full control of the vehicle. If you cannot get far enough away front seats.
Have a front passenger adjust their from the steering wheel and still
seat as far to the rear as possible. reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
14
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer
Reclining the seat-back too far rests against the occupant’s chest
can result in serious injury or reduces the protective capability of

death in a crash. the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
Adjust the seat-back to an and being seriously injured. The
upright position, and sit well farther a seat-back is reclined, the
back in the seat. greater the risk of injury.
See page 141 for how to adjust the

seat-backs.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a

comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-

backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
15
4.Adjust the Head Restraints Properly adjusted head restraints

will help protect occupants from
Improperly positioning head whiplash and other crash injuries.
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be See page 142 for how to adjust the
seriously injured in a crash. head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
Make sure head restraints are restraints work.
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so

the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head

restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
16
5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, Improperly positioning the seat
then tug on the belt to make sure the belts can cause serious injury

belt is securely latched. Check that or death in a crash.
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Make sure all seat belts are
injuries in a crash. properly positioned before
driving.
If the seat belt touches or crosses

your neck, or if it crosses your arm
Position the lap part of the belt as instead of your shoulder, you need to
low as possible across your hips, adjust the seat belt anchor height.
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. If necessary, pull up on the belt again
This lets your strong pelvic bones to remove any slack, then check that
take the force of a crash and reduces the belt rests across the center of
the chance of internal injuries. your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash

over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
CONTINUED
17
RELEASE BUTTONS Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
If a seat belt does not seem to work important that they continue to sit
properly, it may not protect the upright, well back in their seats, with
occupant in a crash. their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
No one should sit in a seat with an engine is off.
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can Sitting improperly can increase the
result in serious injury or death. chance of injury during a crash. For
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as example, if an occupant slouches,
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. lies down, turns sideways, sits
an anchor, squeeze the two release forward, leans forward or sideways,
buttons, and slide the anchor up or See page 21 for additional or puts one or both feet up, the
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts chance of injury during a crash is
positions). and how to take care of them. greatly increased.
18
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding

vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
19
Additional Safety Precautions Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or
Two people should never use the between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
same seat belt. If they do, they airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
could be very seriously injured in a objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
crash. a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
Do not put any accessories on seat if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the Do not attach or place objects on Passengers should not stand up or
shoulder part of a seat belt can the front airbag covers. Objects on change seats while the vehicle is
reduce the protective capability of the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ moving. A passenger who is not
the seat belt and increase the could interfere with the proper wearing a seat belt during a crash
chance of serious injury in a crash. operation of the airbags or be or emergency stop can be thrown
propelled inside the vehicle and against the inside of the vehicle,
Never let passengers ride in the hurt someone if the airbags inflate. against other occupants, or out of
cargo area or on top of a folded- the vehicle.
down back seat. If they do, they Keep your hands and arms away
could be very seriously injured in a from the airbag covers. If your Do not cover or replace front seat-
crash. hands or arms are close to an back covers without consulting
airbag cover, they could be injured your dealer. Improperly replacing
if the airbag inflates. or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
20
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components Seat Belt Indicator If either the driver or a front
Your seat belt system includes lap/ passenger does not fasten their seat
shoulder belts in all seating positions. The seat belt system includes an belt while driving, the beeper will
The front seat belts are also indicator on the instrument panel sound and the indicator will flash

equipped with automatic seat belt and a beeper to remind you and your again at regular intervals.
tensioners. front passenger to fasten your seat
belts. In addition to the seat belt reminder
indicator in the instrument panel,
This system monitors the front seat you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
belts. If you turn the ignition switch BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
to the ON (II) position before your SEAT BELT’’ message. This remains
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will displayed if you ignore it and do not
sound and the indicator will flash. If fasten the seat belt while driving.
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will When no one is sitting in the front
stop flashing but remain on. passenger’s seat, or an infant or
small child is riding there, the
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT indicator may not come on and the
BELT’’ message on the multi- beeper may not sound.
information display.
If a front passenger does not fasten

their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position. CONTINUED
21
If the indicator comes on or the Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat The lap/shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
belt is latched and there is no front your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
seat passenger and no items on the and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some
front seat, something may be tension on the belt. During a collision
interfering with the monitoring To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
system. Look for and remove: plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
Any items under the front latched (see page 17 for how to
passenger’s seat. properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
Any object(s) hanging on the seat To unlock the belt, press the red that must be activated to secure a
or in the seat-back pocket. PRESS button on the buckle. Guide child seat (see page 49 ).
the belt across your body so that it
Any object on the floor that is retracts completely. After exiting the
touching the rear of the seat-back. vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
If no obstructions are found, have door.
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
22
If the shoulder part of the belt is Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners can be activated
pulled all the way out, the lockable during a collision in which the front
retractor will activate. The belt will airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
retract, but it will not allow the airbags would not be needed, but the

passenger to move freely. additional restraint could be helpful.
To deactivate the lockable retractor, If the tensioner is activated, the SRS

unlatch the buckle and let the seat indicator comes on and the tensioner
belt fully retract. To refasten the must be replaced.
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
Allowing a child to play with a For added protection, the front seat
seat belt or wrap one around belts are equipped with automatic
their neck can result in serious seat belt tensioners. When activated,
injury or death. the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
Instruct children not to play with a front passenger in position.
any seat belt and make sure
any unused seat belt a child
can reach is buckled, fully
retracted, and locked.
23
Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

For safety, you should check the you should have your dealer inspect
condition of your seat belts regularly. the belt, and replace it if necessary. Not checking or maintaining
A belt that has been worn during a seat belts can result in serious
Pull each belt out fully, and look for crash may not provide the same level injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check of protection in a subsequent crash. do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed.
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
333 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty

on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
24
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(9) (8) (2) (11)

(13) (14)
(5)
(1)
(4)
(8)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag

(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit (3)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags (5)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors (6)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (10) (16)
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensor (4)
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/ (15)
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) SRS Indicator (14)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags (16) (7)(12)
(15) Safing Sensor
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
CONTINUED
25
Your Airbag System includes: Automatic front seat belt Sensors that can detect whether
tensioners (see page 23 ). the driver’s seat belt and the front
Two SRS (supplemental restraint passenger’s seat belt are latched
system) front airbags. The driver’s Sensors that can detect a or unlatched (see page 21 ).
airbag is stored in the center of moderate to severe front impact or
the steering wheel; the front side impact. A driver’s seat position sensor that
passenger’s airbag is stored in the monitors the distance of the seat
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS Sensors that can detect whether a from the front airbag. If the seat is
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ). child is in the passenger’s side too far forward, the airbag will
airbag path and signal the control inflate with less force (see page
Two side airbags, one for the unit to turn the airbag off (see 30 ).
driver and one for a front page 32 ).
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 32 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for

each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
33 ).
26
Weight sensors that monitor the A sophisticated electronic system An indicator on the instrument
weight on the front passenger’s that continually monitors and panel that alerts you that the
seat. If the weight is about 65 records information about the passenger’s side airbag has been
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight sensors, the control unit, the turned off (see page 34 ).

of an infant or small child), the airbag activators, the seat belt
passenger’s front airbag will be tensioners, and driver and front An indicator on the dashboard that
turned off (see page 30 ). passenger seat belt use when the alerts you that the passenger’s
ignition switch is in the ON (II) front airbag has been turned off
position. (see page 35 ).
An indicator on the instrument Emergency backup power in case

panel that alerts you to a possible your vehicle’s electrical system is
problem with your airbag system disconnected in a crash.
components (see page 34 ).
27
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally

inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will inflate there is no passenger in the front The total time for inflation and
the driver’s and front passenger’s seat, or if the advanced airbag deflation is less than a second, so
airbags, at the time and with the system has turned the passenger’s fast that most occupants are not
force needed. airbag off (see page 35 ). aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
28
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold

looks like smoke. This is actually Front Airbags (SRS)
powder from the airbag’s surface. Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
Although the powder is not harmful, stage, multiple-threshold front

people with respiratory problems airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash
may experience some temporary severe enough to cause one or both
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of front airbags to deploy, the airbags
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do can inflate at different rates,
so. depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts
are latched, and/or other factors.
Front airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help
reduce the likelihood of head and
chest injuries in frontal crashes.
CONTINUED
29
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work

properly:
PASSENGER’S
Occupants must sit upright and DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any objects or metal items sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
Objects placed or pushed under inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in front, if the
the front passenger’s seat may the severity of the impact. sensors detect the weight of an
cause the sensor to malfunction, infant or small child (up to about 65
increasing the risk of injury in a If there is a problem with the sensor, lbs or 29 kg), the system will
crash. the SRS indicator will come on, and automatically turn the passenger’s
the airbag will inflate in the normal front airbag off.
Failure to follow these instructions manner regardless of the driver’s
could damage the sensors or prevent seating position.
them from working properly.
30
Be aware that objects placed on the To ensure that the passenger’s Back seat passengers should not
passenger’s seat can also cause the advanced front airbag system will wedge objects or intentionally
airbag to be turned off. work properly, do not do anything force their feet under the front
that would increase or decrease the passenger seat.

When the passenger airbag gets weight on the front passenger’s seat.
turned off by the weight sensors, a This includes:
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes A rear passenger pushing or
on (see page 35 ). pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the Moving the front seat forcibly
airbag is automatically turned off. back against cargo on the seat or
However, the passenger airbag off floor behind it.
indicator in this situation will not
come on. Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat or seat-back

forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
31
How Your Side Airbags Work Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect
side airbag may not deploy if there is a child riding in the front passenger’s
no passenger. seat.
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a

If you ever have a moderate to short adult leans sideways, or a
severe side impact, sensors will larger adult slouches and leans
detect rapid acceleration and signal sideways into the airbag’s
the control unit to instantly inflate deployment path.
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag. Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
32
If the side airbag off indicator comes How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s
on (see page 34 ), have the Work side, the passenger’s side curtain
passenger sit upright. Once the airbag will inflate even if there are no
passenger is out of the airbag’s occupants on that side of the vehicle.

deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the One or both side curtain airbags may
indicator will go out. inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
There will be some delay between front airbags to deploy.
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment To get the best protection from the
path and when the indicator comes side curtain airbags, occupants
on or goes off. should wear their seat belts and sit
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG upright and well back in their seats.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a In a moderate to severe side impact,
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff sensors will detect rapid acceleration
system from working properly. and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag.
33
How the SRS Indicator U.S. Canada How the Side

Works Airbag Off
The SRS indicator alerts you to a Ignoring the SRS indicator can Indicator Works
potential problem with your airbag result in serious injury or death This indicator alerts you that the
system components. if the airbag systems or passenger’s side airbag has been
tensioners do not work properly. automatically shut off. It does not
When you turn the ignition switch to mean there is a problem with your
the ON (II) position, this indicator Have your vehicle checked by a side airbags.
comes on for several seconds then dealer as soon as possible if
goes off. This tells you the system is the SRS indicator alerts you to When you turn the ignition switch to
working properly. a possible problem. the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
If the indicator comes on at any and then go off (see page 65 ). If it
other time, or does not come on at all, You will also see a ‘‘CHECK doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
you should have the system checked AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the on while driving without a passenger
by your dealer. For example: multi-information display. in the front seat, have the system
checked.
If the SRS indicator does not come If you see any of these indications,
on after you turn the ignition the airbag system components may You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
switch to the ON (II) position. not work properly when you need SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
them. multi-information display.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
34
How the Passenger Airbag Off The passenger airbag off indicator
Indicator Works may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR the airbag cutoff threshold.

U.S. U.S.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
Canada Canada passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
On vehicle with navigation system On vehicle without navigation system
This indicator alerts you that the Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s front airbag has been front seat can cause the indicator to
shut off because weight sensors come on.
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small If no weight is detected on the front
child) on the front passenger’s seat. seat, the airbag will be automatically
It does not mean there is a problem shut off. However, the indicator will
with the airbag. not come on.
CONTINUED
35
If the indicator comes on with no Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a
front seat passenger and no objects Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an
on the seat, or with an adult riding maintenance free, and there are no authorized dealer as soon as
there, something may be interfering parts you can safely service. possible. If you ignore this
with the weight sensors. Look for However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not
and remove: vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
Any items under the front An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
passenger’s seat. that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
Any object(s) hanging on the seat unit and other related parts. Any should inspect the driver’s seat
or in the seat-back pocket. seat belt tensioner that activates position sensor, the front
must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors, the
Any object on the floor that is front seat belt tensioners, and all
touching the rear of the seat-back. We recommend against the use of seat belts and their anchors worn
salvaged airbag system during a crash to make sure they
If no obstructions are found, have components, including the airbag, are operating properly.
your vehicle checked by a dealer as tensioners, sensors, and control
soon as possible. unit.
Do not try to remove or replace

any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
36
Additional Safety Precautions Do not remove or modify a front Do not expose the front passenger’s
Do not attempt to deactivate your seat without consulting your seat-back to liquid. If water or
airbags. Together, airbags and dealer. This could make the another liquid soaks into a seat-
seat belts provide the best driver’s seat position sensor or the back, it can prevent the side airbag

protection. front passenger’s weight sensors cutoff system from working
ineffective. If it is necessary to properly.
Do not tamper with airbag remove or modify a front seat to
components or wiring for any accommodate a person with
reason. Tampering could cause disabilities, first contact Honda
the airbags to deploy, possibly Automobile Customer Service at
causing very serious injury. (800) 999-1009 in the US, or
Honda Customer Relations at 1-
888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.
37
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
collisions are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children age 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state, larger child should be properly
Canadian province and territory restrained with a seat belt and
requires that infants and children be use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect properly restrained when they ride in
them. However, despite their best a vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 52 − 55 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 43 − 51 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
38
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to crash statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off under certain Children who have outgrown child
children may ride. circumstances (see page 35 ), please seats are also at risk of being injured
follow these guidelines: or killed by an inflating passenger’s
Children who ride in back are less front airbag. Whenever possible,
likely to be injured by striking Infants larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt. (See page 52 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger
in the back. of the child seat with enough force children.)
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
CONTINUED
39
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models

front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained SUN VISORS DASHBOARD
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
40
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in the back

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child than the front.
front: attention.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 52 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 141 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
17 ).
41
Additional Safety Precautions Make sure any unused seat belt Lock all doors and the hatch when
Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, your vehicle is not in use. Children
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, who play in vehicles can
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and accidentally get trapped inside the
thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose vehicle. Teach your children not to
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they play in or around vehicles.
seat-back. If you are wearing a can be seriously or fatally injured.
seat belt, the child can be torn (See pages 49 and 50 for how to Keep vehicle keys and remote
from your arms and be seriously activate and deactivate the transmitters out of the reach of
hurt or killed. lockable retractor.) children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
Never put a seat belt over yourself Do not leave children alone in a vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
and a child. During a crash, the vehicle. Leaving children without switch, and open the hatch, which
belt could press deep into the child adult supervision is illegal in most can lead to accidental injury or
and cause serious or fatal injuries. states, Canadian provinces and death.
territories, and can be very
Never let two children use the hazardous.
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a For example, infants and small
crash. children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
Use the childproof door locks to child left alone with the key in the
prevent children from opening the ignition switch can accidentally set
rear doors. This can prevent the vehicle in motion, possibly
children from accidentally falling injuring themselves or others.
out (see page 134 ).
42
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving their seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking their
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least It could also interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
43
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children and weight are appropriate for a
strongly recommend that you install rear-facing seat.
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat Of the different seats available, we
as far forward as needed, and leave it recommend those that have a five-
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get point harness system as shown.
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
Placing a rear-facing child seat for the seat.
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a Child Seat Placement
crash. We strongly recommend placing a
Child Seat Type forward-facing child seat in a back
Always place a rear-facing child Many states, Canadian provinces and seat, not the front.
seat in the back seat, not the territories allow a child one year of
front. age or older who also meets the Placing a forward-facing child seat in
minimum size and weight the front seat of a vehicle equipped
requirements to transition from a with a passenger’s airbag can be
rear-facing child seat to a forward hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
facing seat. Know the requirements far forward, or the child’s head is
where you are driving and follow the thrown forward during a collision, an
child seat instructions. Many experts inflating airbag can strike the child
recommend use of a rear-facing seat with enough force to cause very
up to age two, if the child’s height serious or fatal injuries.
44
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Even with advanced front airbags Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
that automatically turn the Most child seats are LATCH- equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
passenger’s front airbag off (see compatible (Lower Anchors and compatible child seat can be installed
page 35 ), a back seat is the safest Tethers for CHildren). Some have a using the seat belt and a top tether

place for a small child. rigid-type connector, while others for added security. This is because
have a flexible-type connector. Both all child seats are required to be
If it is necessary to put a forward- are equally easy to use. Some designed so that they can be secured
facing child seat in the front, move existing and previously owned child with a lap belt or the lap part of a
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as seats can only be installed using the lap/shoulder belt.
possible, and be sure the child seat is seat belt. Whichever type you
firmly secured to the vehicle and the choose, follow the child seat In addition, the child seat
child is properly strapped in the seat. manufacturer’s use and care manufacturer may advise that a seat
instructions as well as the belt be used to attach a LATCH-
instructions in this manual. Proper compatible seat once a child reaches
installation is key to maximizing your a specified weight. Please read the
Placing a forward-facing child child’s safety. child seat owner’s manual for proper
seat in the front seat can result installation instructions.
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-

facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
45
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Important considerations when Installing a Child Seat A child seat secured with a seat belt
selecting a child seat After selecting a proper child seat should be installed as firmly as
Make sure the child seat meets the and a good place to install the seat, possible. However, it does not need
following three requirements: there are three main steps in to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
installing the seat: movement can be expected and
The child seat is the correct type should not reduce the child seat’s
and size for the child. 1. Properly secure the child seat to effectiveness.
the vehicle. All child seats must be
The child seat is the correct type secured to the vehicle with the lap If the child seat is not secure, try
for the seating position. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with installing it in a different seating
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and position, or use a different style of
The child seat is compliant with Tethers for CHildren) system. A child seat that can be firmly secured.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety child whose seat is not properly
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor secured to the vehicle can be
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly

secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
46
Installing a Child Seat
3. Secure the child in the child seat. Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON
Make sure the child is properly LATCH
strapped in the child seat Your vehicle is equipped with
according to the child seat maker’s LATCH (Lower Anchors and

instructions. A child who is not Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
properly secured in a child seat rear seats.
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The lower anchors are located
The following pages provide between the seat-back and seat
guidelines on how to properly install bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat. A forward-facing child a child seat designed for use with
seat is used in all examples, but the LATCH. LOWER ANCHORS
instructions are the same for a rear-
facing child seat. The location of each lower anchor is To install a LATCH-compatible child
indicated by a small button above the seat:
anchor point.
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
You can find lower anchors in the tongue away from the lower
slits in the seat-backs. anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
47
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Rigid type Flexible type ANCHOR
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle Other LATCH-compatible seats have 5. Lift the head restraint (see page
seat, then attach the seat to the a flexible-type connector as shown 142 ), then route the tether strap
lower anchors according to the above. through the legs of the head
child seat maker’s instructions. restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
Some LATCH-compatible seats the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
have a rigid-type connector as for adjusting or tightening the fit.
shown above.
48
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
tether anchor, then tighten the Shoulder Belt
strap as instructed by the child When not using the LATCH system,
seat maker. all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
If the tether strap is too long and shoulder belt.
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
tightened securely. all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
7. Push and pull the child seat that must be activated to secure a
forward and from side-to-side to child seat.
verify that it is secure.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
CONTINUED
49
2. To activate the lockable retractor, 4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
slowly pull the shoulder part of the locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
belt all the way out until it stops, the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
then let the belt feed back into the up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
retractor. lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
it. If the belt is locked, you will not steps.
be able to pull it out. If you can pull To remove slack, it may help to
the belt out, it is not locked, and put weight on the child seat, or To deactivate the lockable retractor
you will need to repeat these steps. push on the back of the seat while and remove a child seat, unlatch the
pulling up on the belt. buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
50
Installing a Child Seat with a

Tether
ANCHOR Outer Position TETHER STRAP HOOK Center Position TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHORAGE POINTS ANCHOR ANCHOR
A child seat with a tether can be 1. After properly securing the child 3. Tighten the strap according to the
installed in any seating position in seat (see page 49 ), lift the head seat maker’s instructions.
the back seat, using one of the restraint, then route the tether
anchorage points shown above. strap over the seat-back and If the tether strap is too long and
through the head restraint legs. cannot be tightened firmly, find a
Since a tether can provide additional route where the strap can be
security to the lap/shoulder belt 2. Attach the tether strap hook to the tightened securely.
installation, we recommend using a anchor, making sure the strap is
tether whenever one is required or not twisted.
available.
51
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear the lap/ or death if the passenger’s front
shoulder belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
52
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat territories where you intend to drive.
between the child’s neck and arm?
Booster seats can be high-back or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as low-back. Whichever style you select,

possible, touching the child’s make sure the booster seat meets
thighs? federal safety standards (see page
46 ) and that you follow the booster
5. Will the child be able to stay seat maker’s instructions.
seated like this for the whole trip?
If a child who uses a booster seat
If you answer yes to all these must ride in front, move the vehicle
questions, the child is ready to wear seat as far back as possible, and be
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If sure the child is wearing the seat
you answer no to any question, the belt properly.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a A child may continue using a booster
back seat and use a booster seat seat until the tops of their ears are
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them even with the top of the vehicle’s or
properly without the booster. booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
Some states, Canadian provinces and the lap/shoulder belt without a
territories also require children to booster seat.
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the states, provinces or
53
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information.
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 17 and 52 ). If most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front. near the floor.
of position.
Maturity Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must properly and securely positioned.
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride. children sometimes need to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
54
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
55
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the hatch open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill hatch open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. you. and set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Set the fan speed to high.
The vehicle was in a crash that Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
may have damaged the underside. engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
vehicle out of the garage.
56
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD SUN VISORS

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only U.S. models
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels

carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP
CONTINUED
57
Safety Labels
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models Canadian models
58
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 60 Driver’s Seat Height
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Adjustment ............................. 141
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 62 Head Restraints ......................... 142
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 72 Folding the Rear Seats Down .. 145
controls are within easy reach. Multi-Information Display .............. 75 Armrest ....................................... 146
Controls Near the Steering Mirrors ............................................ 147

Wheel .......................................... 118 Adjusting the Power Mirrors ... 147
Windshield Wipers and Power Mirror Heaters............... 148
Washers ...................................... 119 Power Windows ............................. 149
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 120 Parking Brake ................................ 151
Daytime Running Lights .......... 123 Interior Convenience Items .......... 152
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 124 Cargo Area Cover ...................... 153
Hazard Warning Button ................ 125 Under Floor Storages ................ 155
Rear Window Defogger ................ 126 Floor Storage Compartments .. 155
ECON Button ................................. 127 Beverage Holders ...................... 156
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 128 Accessory Power Socket .......... 157
Keys and Locks.............................. 129 Console Compartment .............. 157
Immobilizer System....................... 130 Glove Box ................................... 158
Ignition Switch ............................... 131 Center Tray ................................ 158
Door Locks ..................................... 133 Center Pockets........................... 159
Childproof Door Locks ............. 134 Coat Hook ................................... 160
Remote Transmitter ...................... 135 Sun Visors ................................... 160
Hatch ............................................... 139 Vanity Mirror ............................. 160
Unlocking the Hatch ................. 140 Interior Lights ................................ 161
Seats ................................................ 141
Front Seat Adjustments ............ 141
59
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.62) MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

GAUGES (P.72) (P.72, 75) (P.125)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.147) NAVIGATION SYSTEM＊2
AUDIO SYSTEM
ECON BUTTON (P.170)
(P.127)
DOOR LOCK TAB

(P.133) PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.133) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.164)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES AUTOMATIC
(P.149) TRANSMISSION (CVT)
(P.273)
PARKING BRAKE LEVER

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE (P.151)
(P.250)
PADDLE SHIFTERS＊1 USB ADAPTER CABLE＊1
(P.278) (P.199, 207)
＊1 : If equipped
＊2 : Refer to the navigation system manual.
60
Instrument Panel
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.67) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.67) (ABS) INDICATOR (P.64)
SYSTEM MESSAGE HIGH BEAM
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.70) INDICATOR
(AMBER) (P.64) (P.69) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR＊ (P.69)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.69)
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65, 295) ECON MODE INDICATOR (P.71) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
INDICATOR (P.68)
VSA OFF INDICATOR SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR＊
(P.65, 295) (P.70)
DOOR/HATCH OPEN
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR (P.68)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.63)
IMA SYSTEM SIDE AIRBAG OFF

INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.65)
(P.66)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP PARKING BRAKE AND
(P.62, 417) BRAKE SYSTEM
12 VOLT BATTERY INDICATOR (RED)
CHARGING SYSTEM AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR (P.63, 368)
INDICATOR (P.63, 416) (P.66, 283, 285) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
LOW OIL PRESSURE LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.70) SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR (P.64)
INDICATOR (P.62, 415) LOW TIRE PRESSURE/ SEAT BELT REMINDER
＊ : If equipped TPMS INDICATOR＊ (P.66) INDICATOR (P.62) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR＊ (P.69)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
61
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If your front passenger does not Malfunction Indicator
indicators to give you important fasten their seat belt, the indicator Lamp
information about your vehicle. comes on about 6 seconds after the You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ignition switch is turned to the ON EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
Seat Belt Reminder (II) position. the multi-information display. For
Indicator more information, see page 367 .
This indicator comes on when you If either of you do not fasten your
turn the ignition switch to the ON seat belt while driving, the beeper Low Oil Pressure
(II) position. It reminds you and your will sound and the indicator will flash Indicator
passengers to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals, and you The engine can be severely damaged
A beeper also sounds if you have not will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or if this indicator flashes or stays on
fastened your seat belt. ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT when the engine is running, and you
BELT’’ message on the multi- will see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT information display. For more LEVEL’’ message on the multi-
BELT’’ message on the multi- information, see page 21 . information display. For more
information display. information, see page 365 .
If you turn the ignition switch to the

ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
62
12 Volt Battery Charging U.S. Canada Parking Brake and 2. If it stays on after you have fully
System Indicator Brake System released the parking brake while
If this indicator comes on when the Indicator (Red) the engine is running, or if it
engine is running, the 12 volt battery This indicator has two functions: comes on while driving, it can
is not being charged, and you will indicate a problem in the brake
also see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING 1. It comes on when you turn the system. You will also see a

SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- ignition switch to the ON (II) ‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or
information display. For more position. It is a reminder to check ‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
information, see page 366 . the parking brake. Driving with message on the multi-information
the parking brake not fully display. For more information, see
Immobilizer System released can damage the brakes page 368 .
Indicator and tires.
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the If you drive without releasing the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if parking brake, a beeper will sound,
you have inserted a properly coded and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
ignition key. If it is not a properly PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
coded key, the indicator will blink, the multi-information display (see
and the engine’s fuel system will be page 151 ).
disabled (see page 130 ).
63
U.S. Canada Brake System Anti-lock Brake System Supplemental Restraint

Indicator (ABS) Indicator System Indicator
(Amber) This indicator normally comes on for This indicator comes on briefly when
This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the you turn the ignition switch to the
a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) ON (II) position. If it comes on at
ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other any other time, it indicates a
position, and START (III) position. time, there is a problem with the potential problem with your front
When the brake system indicator ABS. If this happens, have your airbags. This indicator will also alert
(amber) comes on and stays on, vehicle checked at a dealer. With you to a potential problem with your
there is a problem with the Creep this indicator on, your vehicle still airbag system components. For
Aid System or Brake Assist (the has normal braking ability but no more information, see page 34 .
normal brake operates properly). anti-lock function. For more
Have your vehicle checked by your information, see page 289 . You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
dealer. For more information, see AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
page 287 . You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS multi-information display (see page
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- 89 ).
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE information display (see page 89 ).
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page 89 ).
64
U.S. Canada Vehicle Stability Assist If the VSA indicator illuminates, hill
Side Airbag Off (VSA) System Indicator start assist will not be working.
Indicator This indicator has two functions: Without hill start assist, the vehicle
This indicator comes on briefly when will roll downhill immediately when
you turn the ignition switch to the 1. It flashes when VSA is active you release the brake on an incline.
ON (II) position. If it comes on at (see page 295 ).

any other time, it indicates that the You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
passenger’s side airbag has 2. If it comes on and stays on at any SYSTEM’’ or ‘‘CHECK HILL START
automatically shut off. You will also other time, there is a problem with ASSIST SYSTEM’’ message on the
see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG the VSA or hill start assist system. multi-information display (see page
OFF’’ message on the multi- Take your vehicle to a dealer to 90 ).
information display. For more have it checked. Without VSA,
information, see page 34 . your vehicle still has normal VSA OFF Indicator
driving ability, but will not have
VSA traction and stability It comes on as a reminder that you
enhancement. See page 295 for have turned off the vehicle stability
more information on the VSA assist (VSA) system.
system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 295 .
65
IMA System Indicator Low Tire Pressure/ If this happens, pull to the side of the
TPMS Indicator road when it is safe, check which tire
This indicator normally comes on for U.S. models only has lost pressure, and determine the
a few seconds when you turn the This indicator normally comes on for cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
ignition switch to the ON (II) a few seconds when you turn the replace the flat tire with the compact
position. If it comes on at any other ignition switch to the ON (II) spare (see page 351 ), and have the
time, it indicates a problem in the position. flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
integrated motor assist (IMA) If two or more tires are underinflated,
system. With the IMA indicator on, This indicator has two functions: call a professional towing service.
the vehicle may not accelerate as it Refer to page 376 for more
normally does. Have the vehicle 1. If it comes on while driving, it information.
checked by the dealer as soon as indicates that one or more of your
possible. vehicle’s tires are significantly low 2. If this indicator begins to flash,
on pressure. there is a problem with the tire
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK IMA pressure monitoring system
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE (TPMS). You will also see a
information display. PRESSURE’’ message on the multi- ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
information display (see page 291 ). message on the multi-information
Auto Idle Stop Indicator display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
See pages 283 and 285 . minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page
292 .
66
High Temperature Low Temperature

Indicator Indicator
This indicator shows the This indicator shows the
temperature of the engine coolant. It temperature of the engine coolant. If
normally comes on when you turn there is no problem, this indicator
the ignition switch to the ON (II) comes on when the engine is cold. If

position and goes off after a few it comes on when the engine is warm
seconds. In normal driving (normal operating temperature),
conditions, this indicator should not have the vehicle inspected by your
blink or stay on. In severe driving dealer as soon as possible.
conditions, such as very hot weather
or a long period of uphill driving, this
indicator may blink. This means the
engine coolant temperature is high. If the indicator begins to blink or
If the indicator begins to blink while stays on, you will also see a ‘‘WATER
you are driving, be sure to slow down TEMP HOT’’ message on the multi-
to prevent overheating. If the information display. This warning
indicator stays on, pull safely to the will alert you that the engine should
side of the road and turn off the be cooled down.
engine. See page 362 for instructions
and precautions on checking the Do not drive the vehicle while the
engine’s cooling system. indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.
67
Electric Power Steering If you turn the steering wheel to the Door/Hatch Open
(EPS) Indicator full left or right position repeatedly Indicator
This indicator normally comes on while stopping or driving at very low This indicator comes on red if any
when you turn the ignition switch to speed, you may feel slightly harder door or the hatch lid is not closed
the ON (II) position and goes off steering in order to prevent damage tightly.
after the engine starts. If it comes on to the steering system caused by
at any other time, there is a problem overheating. This may also happen if You will also see a corresponding
in the electric power steering system. you hold the steering wheel on the indicator(s) on the multi-information
full left or right position for a while. display to indicate which door and/
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a or the hatch is not closed tightly (see
safe place and turn off the engine. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER page 12 ).
Reset the system by restarting the STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on
engine. The indicator will stay on, the multi-information display.
but should go off after driving a
short distance. If it does not go off,
or comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.
68
Turn Signal and Lights On Indicator Cruise Main Indicator

Hazard Warning
Indicators This indicator reminds you that the On LX and EX models
The left or right turn signal indicator exterior lights are on. It comes on This indicator comes on when you
blinks when you signal a lane change when the light switch is in either the turn on the cruise control system by
or turn. If an indicator does not blink or position. If you turn the pressing the CRUISE button on the

or blinks rapidly, it usually means ignition switch to the ACCESSORY steering wheel (see page 224 ).
one of the turn signal bulbs is (I) or the LOCK (0) position without
burned out (see pages 327 and 329 ). turning off the light switch, this Cruise Control Indicator
Replace the bulb as soon as possible, indicator will remain on. A reminder
since other drivers cannot see that chime will also sound when you open On LX and EX models
you are signaling. the driver’s door. This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
When you press the hazard warning High Beam Indicator 224 for information on operating the
button, both turn signal indicators cruise control.
and all turn signals on the outside of This indicator comes on with the
the vehicle flash. high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 121 .
This indicator also comes on with

reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 123 ).
69
Low Fuel Indicator System Message Security System Indicator

Indicator On LX and EX models
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multi-
information display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 76 ) to see the message (see
page 89 ).
Most of the time, this indicator

comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
LOW FUEL INDICATOR seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you This indicator comes on when the
must refuel soon. You will also see a security system is set. For more
‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi- information, see page 223 .
When the indicator comes on, there

are about 1.8 U.S. gal (6.9 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
70
ECON Mode Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for

a few seconds when you turn the
position. When you turn the econ

mode on by pressing the ECON
button with the ignition switch in the
ON (II) position, this indicator will
come on.
You will also see the symbol on the

multi-information display with ECON
ON or ECON OFF (see page 75 ).
71
Gauges
Speedometer/Ambient Meter
This shows your speed in kilometers
SPEEDOMETER/AMBIENT METER per hour (km/h) or miles per hour
(mph) depending on the selected
speedometer display. You can switch
the display between km/h and mph
(see page 73 ).
CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE TACHOMETER FUEL GAUGE

The speedometer also has an
ambient meter. The color of the
ambient meter changes
automatically according to your
driving style (see page 268 ).
You can customize the setting of the

ambient meter (see page 103 ).
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB MULTI-INFORMATION SEL/RESET KNOB

DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown.
72
Gauges
Sel/Reset Knob Km/Mile Change Knob Fuel Gauge

This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
SEL/RESET KNOB KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB the catalytic converter.
To switch the lower segment of the Each time you press and hold the
multi-information display between km/mile change knob, the
the odometer with the outside speedometer reading switches
temperature and trip meter with the between miles per hour (mph) and
outside temperature, press the sel/ kilometers per hour (km/h).
reset knob repeatedly. For more
information, see page 78 .
73
Gauges
Charge/Assist Gauge You can also check the status of the

IMA system function on the multi-
IMA ASSIST GAUGE information display (see page 84 ).
If the IMA battery is too hot or too

cold, the IMA system limits the IMA
battery’s output power to protect the
battery. This disables the IMA assist
and auto idle stop, even though the
battery level indicator on the multi-
information display may show that
the battery is well-charged (see page
IMA CHARGE GAUGE 85 ). Therefore, if the motor assist
is frequently used, the battery
This gauge shows you the charge/ becomes hot and starts to limit its
discharge status of the Integrated output power.
Motor Assist (IMA). When the IMA
is assisting the engine, the pointer It takes a short time to normalize the
stays in the assist gauge (upper part IMA battery’s output power
of the gauge). When the IMA depending on the weather.
battery is being charged, the pointer
stays in the charge gauge (lower part
of the gauge).
74
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the Normal Display Messages

instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II) ECON is On. ECON is Off.
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more

comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
There are three types of messages:

normal display messages, engine oil
life and maintenance messages, and
system messages. You will see an ‘‘ECON ON’’ or If you do not fasten your seat belt,
‘‘ECON OFF’’ message on the multi- you will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
You can select the displayed information display according to the BELT’’ message on the multi-
language and also customize some previous ECON setting when you information display when you turn
vehicle control settings to your liking turn the ignition switch to the ON the ignition switch to the ON (II)
with the multi-information display (II) position (see page 127 ). position.
and the three buttons on the steering
wheel (see page 76 ). These messages go off several
seconds after the key is inserted into
the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
75
INFO BUTTONS (▲/▼) SEL/RESET BUTTON
SEL/RESET BUTTON INFO (▲/▼) BUTTON

U.S. model is shown. LX and EX models Insight model
The multi-information display With the ignition switch in the ON

changes to the blank display shown (II) position, the multi-information
above several seconds after you turn display changes as shown on page
the ignition switch to the ON (II) 78 each time you press the INFO
position. (▲/▼) button or SEL/RESET
button.
76
In the multi-information display, the In the normal display mode, the

system message is also displayed upper and middle segments display
(see page 88 ) and you can MIDDLE UPPER trip computer information, such as
customize your vehicle control SEGMENT SEGMENT fuel economy or average speed. The
settings (see page 91 ). lower segment displays the
odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside

temperature, and engine oil life and
maintenance item code(s).
LOWER
U.S. model is shown. SEGMENT
The multi-information display

consists of an upper segment, a
middle segment and a lower
segment.
CONTINUED
77
HFL＊ (See page 87)
Eco Guide
Feedback Average Fuel
Monitor Economy Record Trip Computer (See page 81)
(See page 81) (See page 81)
IMA System Power

Flow Monitor/
Engine Oil Life IMA Battery Level
(See page 80) Indicator
(See page 84/85)
Outside Temperature
(See page 80)
: Press the INFO button ▼.

: Press the INFO button ▲.
: Press the SEL/RESET button. ＊ : This display will be shown when the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.
78
Odometer Trip Meter When you reset Trip A, average fuel

economy A is reset at the same time.
TRIP METER A TRIP METER B When you reset Trip B, average fuel
U.S. Canada economy B is reset.
In the customizing mode, you can set

Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset when you refuel your vehicle
(see page 99 ).
ODOMETER U.S. model is shown.
The odometer shows the total This meter shows the number of
distance your vehicle has been miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven. It measures miles in U.S. driven since you last reset it. There
models and kilometers in Canadian are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
models. It is illegal under U.S. B. Each trip meter works
federal law and Canadian provincial/ independently, so you can keep track
territorial regulations to disconnect, of two different distances.
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles To reset a trip meter, display it, then
or kilometers indicated. press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
79
Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the Engine Oil Life

front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat ENGINE OIL LIFE
U.S. Canada reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE temperature is displayed.
This shows the outside Fahrenheit In certain weather conditions, This shows the remaining engine oil
temperature in U.S. models, and temperature readings near freezing life. It shows 100% after the engine
Celsius temperature in Canadian (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is oil is replaced and the display is reset.
models. forming on the road surface. The engine oil life is calculated
based on engine operating conditions.
You can adjust the outside For more information, see page 301 .
temperature display (see page 98 ).
80
Eco Guide Feedback Monitor Average Fuel Economy Records Trip Computer
Indicators in the trip computer show:
U.S. Canada
ECO-DRIVE SCORE DISPLAY
LATEST Average Fuel Economy
AVERAGE FUEL Instant Fuel Economy
ECONOMY Range

Elapsed Time
Average Vehicle Speed
DECELERATION ACCELERATION
MONITOR MONITOR PAST AVERAGE
U.S. model is shown. FUEL ECONOMY
Eco guide feedback monitor consists The average fuel economy records
of three parts. The eco-drive score display shows the average fuel
display shows the accumulated eco economy (0) for the current driving
score for one driving cycle. The cycle and (1-3) for the last three
acceleration monitor shows driving cycles in mpg (U.S. models)
acceleration efficiency. The or l/100 km (Canadian models).
deceleration monitor shows
deceleration efficiency. See page
267 for more information.
CONTINUED
81
Instant Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy A/B
U.S. U.S. Canada
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY A
INSTANT
FUEL
ECONOMY
Canada
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY B
Mile indication (U.S. models) Average Fuel Economy A The average fuel economy will be
: This shows your vehicle’s instant : This shows your vehicle’s average reset when you reset the trip meter,
fuel economy in mpg. fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) or if the vehicle’s 12 volt battery goes
or l/100 km (Canadian models) since dead or is disconnected.
Kilometer indication (Canadian models) you last reset trip computer A.
: This shows your vehicle’s instant You can customize the Trip A and
fuel economy in l/100 km. Average Fuel Economy B Average Fuel Economy A reset
: This shows your vehicle’s average condition on the multi-information
When you turn off the engine, the fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) display (see page 99 ).
instant fuel economy (mpg or l/100 or l/100 km (Canadian models) since
km) is also reset. you last reset trip computer B.
82
RANGE ELAPSED TIME AVG. SPEED

This shows the estimated distance This shows the accumulated This shows the average speed you
you can travel on the fuel remaining traveling time since you last reset it. are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
in the fuel tank. This distance is When you turn the ignition switch to for U.S. models or kilometers per
estimated from the fuel economy the ON (II) position, ELAPSED hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
you received over the last several TIME is reset.

miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), To reset the AVG. SPEED reading,
so it will vary with changes in speed, If you want to reset the ELAPSED press and hold the SEL/RESET
traffic, etc. TIME manually, go to the trip button until the number resets.
computer’s ELAPSED TIME display,
and press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets.
You can customize the ELAPSED

TIME reset conditions on the multi-
information display (see page 100 ).
83
IMA System Power Flow Monitor Powering Status Descriptions Example

The table in the next column shows Only IMA motor is
POWER FLOW the basic monitoring display powering the vehicle and
examples and their descriptions. IMA battery is discharging.
ENGINE
OPERATION
IMA motor is assisting the
ICON
engine with powering the
vehicle. IMA battery is
discharging and the system
is consuming fuel.
IMA BATTERY/BATTERY IMA system is charging
LEVEL INDICATOR IMA battery.
The IMA system power flow monitor

shows the status of the IMA system.
The energy source, and powering Only engine is powering
status of the engine and IMA motor vehicle. The system is
(engine operation icon and IMA consuming fuel.
battery) are represented by arrows
on the display The battery level
indicator shows the state of charge Engine is powering vehicle
of the IMA battery. and IMA system is charging
IMA battery. The system is
consuming fuel.
84
IMA Battery Level Indicator

IMA BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6

Lowest Highest
level of level of
state of state of
charge charge
LEVEL READING
The IMA battery level indicator The position of the battery level The battery level reading may drop
shows you the state of charge of the reading shows the state of charge of near the bottom under driving
battery for the Integrated Motor the IMA battery. When the battery conditions that require IMA motor
Assist (IMA). This battery is level reading is high, the IMA assistance for a long time, such as
recharged and discharged by the battery is well charged. There are prolonged acceleration or climbing a
IMA motor depending on the driving seven positions (Level 0-Level 6) of long hill.
conditions. the battery level reading.
The IMA motor will recharge the
battery as you continue driving.
CONTINUED
85
On vehicle with paddle shifters Since the level is not read directly, This correction of the battery level
The IMA battery is charged at a small sensing errors can, over time, gauge is normal and does not
higher rate when the transmission is cause the gauge to read higher than indicate a problem. If the IMA
in L (Low) mode (see page 282 ). the actual battery level. The system battery develops a problem or
will then perform a correction, and becomes deteriorated, the IMA
On vehicle without paddle shifters the battery level gauge reading will system indicator will come on. If this
The IMA battery is charged at a drop suddenly. When this happens, happens, have the vehicle checked
higher rate when the transmission is IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop are by your dealer as soon as possible.
in LOW (L) range (see page 276 ). disabled until the IMA battery is
sufficiently recharged by normal
If the battery is mostly discharged, driving.
the auto idle stop function is disabled
(see page 283 ).
The battery level gauge does not

read the battery level directly. It
calculates the level by continuously
measuring the current flow, voltage,
and temperature.
86
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To use the system, your cell phone

and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
227 for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to

receive or make phone calls, or visit
the handsfreelink.com website. In
Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or
call (888) 528-7876.
On models with navigation system

You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL) system without touching your
cell phone.
87
System Messages The system message(s) triggers the To switch the message(s) before 5
appropriate indicator(s) on the seconds have elapsed, press the
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR instrument panel, including the INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering
system message indicator, to come wheel.
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s) Even if you press the INFO (▲/▼)
is corrected. button, some messages stay on or
come on again at regular intervals
You will also hear a beep when the until the problem is corrected.
system message comes on for the
first time. If the system message indicator
remains lit on the instrument panel,
Most of the messages are displayed you can see the corresponding
for about 5 seconds, and then the message(s) again by pressing the
If there is a problem with your normal display returns. If there are INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
vehicle, for example the engine oil several system messages to be
level is low or a door is not fully shown, the display switches these Here is a list of all messages:
closed, the multi-information display messages every 5 seconds.
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
88
U.S.
See page See page
12 368
Canada
See page
34

See page See page
13 367
See page See page See page

13 151 366

21 321 289
U.S.
See page See page
21 365
See page
Canada
64
See page See page
34 66
CONTINUED
89
See page See page

70 123
See page
295
See page See page
68 302
U.S.
only See page See page See page
291 131 303
U.S.
only See page See page See page
292 131 304

362 132 249
Canada
See page only See page See page
273 319 80
90
Customized Settings If you turn the ignition switch to the If you want to change any vehicle
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) control settings, select CHG
position, or move the shift lever out SETTING, then press the SEL/
of Park, the display will change to RESET button.
the normal screen.
Refer to the table on the following

If you try to enter the customizing pages about the settings you want to
mode while the vehicle is moving, customize.
you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP AND
SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE
SETTINGS’’ message and you
cannot change the settings.
You can customize some vehicle

control settings. To enter the
customizing mode, press and hold
either INFO button (▲/▼) for more
than 3 seconds. To change the
settings, the ignition switch must be
in the ON (II) position, and the
vehicle must be stopped with the
transmission in Park.
CONTINUED
91
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

METER SETUP LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the language used in the display. ENGLISH＊
(P.96) FRENCH 97
SPANISH
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. Changes the outside temperature reading above or −5°F ∼ ±0°F＊ ∼ 5°F
DISPLAY below its current reading. (U.S.) 98
−3°C ∼ ±0°C＊ ∼ 3°C
(Canada)
TRIP A RESET with Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy ON 99
REFUEL to reset when you refuel. OFF＊
ELAPSED TIME RESET Resets the elapsed time of your current trip. IGN OFF＊ TRIP B 100
TRIP A
DISPLAY KM/MILES Changes the displayed measurement on the multi- AUTO＊
information display. KM 101
MILES
METER COLOR CHANGE Turn the ambient meter feature on or off. ON＊ 103
OFF
LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights 60sec 15sec 105
(P.104) DIMMING TIME stay on after you close the doors. 30sec＊
AUTO LIGHT Changes the timing of when the headlights come MAX LOW
SENSITIVITY on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO HIGH MIN 106
position. MID＊
＊: Default setting
92
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

DOOR SETUP AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes when the doors automatically lock. SHIFT FROM P
(P.108) WITH VEH SPD＊ 109
OFF
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes when the doors automatically unlock. SHIFT TO P＊ DRIVER DOOR＊/
IGN OFF ALL DOORS 110

OFF
DOOR LOCK MODE Changes which doors unlock with the remote DRIVER DOOR ＊ 112
transmitter in a first push. ALL DOORS
KEYLESS LOCK The exterior lights flash each time you press the ON＊
ACKNOWLEDGMENT LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also OFF 114
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
SECURITY RELOCK Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the 90sec
TIMER doors to relock and the security system to set after 60sec 115
you unlock but do not open the door. 30sec＊
DEFAULT ALL Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default. SET 117
(P.117) CANCEL
＊: Default setting
93
Customize Settings Each time you press the INFO (▲/

You can customize some of the ▼) button, the screen changes as
vehicle control settings to your shown on the next page. Press the
preference. Here are the settings INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
you can customize: the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
METER SETUP to enter your selection.
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR SETUP If you do not make any changes,
select ‘‘EXIT.’’ The display returns to
the normal display.
You can also use the select/reset

When you want to change the knob in the instrument panel. Turn
vehicle control settings, press the the knob to select a setting and press
INFO (▲/▼) button to select CHG it to enter your selection.
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button. If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 117 .
94
NORMAL DISPLAY
U.S.
METER SETUP
See page 96

Canada
LIGHTING SETUP
See page 104
DOOR SETUP
See page 108
: Press and hold the INFO (▲/▼) button.

: Press the SEL/RESET button.
95
Meter Setup
Here are the four custom settings
for the meter setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET with REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET
DISPLAY KM/MILES
METER COLOR CHANGE See page 97 See page 98 See page 99 See page
100
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/

▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see See page 103 See page 101
the setting you want to customize,
to enter your selection. : Press the SEL/RESET button.
96
Language Selection

There are three language selections Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
you can make: English, French, and the selections. completed, the display changes as
Spanish. To choose the language you shown above, and then goes back to
want, follow these instructions: Select the desired language by the customizable item screen.
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
You can choose this item to then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeatedly. repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
97
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
U.S. models Canadian models U.S. models Canadian models
If you sometimes find that the Adjust the outside temperature value When your selection is successfully
temperature reading is a few by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button completed, the display changes as
degrees above or below the actual repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET shown above, and then goes back to
temperature, you can adjust it by button to set the desired value. the customizable item screen.
following these instructions:
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
You can choose this item to message appears, go back to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
repeatedly. again.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the setting.
98
Trip A Reset With Refuel

To cause Trip A and average fuel for Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
trip A to reset every time you refuel the selections. completed, the display changes as
your vehicle, follow these shown above, and then goes back to
instructions: Select ON or OFF by pressing the the customizable item screen.
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
You can choose this item to your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button A RESET with REFUEL’’ and repeat
repeatedly. the procedure again.
CONTINUED
99
Elapsed Time Reset

There are three elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
IGN OFF − The elapsed time is

reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset

when Trip A is reset.
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset

when Trip B is reset.
You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to see
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ the selections.
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Select the desired setting by
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
100
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ Display Km/Miles

message appears, go back to
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and
repeat the procedure again.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as To change the displayed
shown above, and then goes back to measurement in the trip computer
the customizable item screen. and trip information and to switch
between kilometers and miles, follow
these instructions:
You can choose this item to

customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
101
AUTO: When you press the km/mile

change knob in the instrument panel
to switch the speedometer reading
between miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour (km/h), the
displayed measurement in the trip
computer and trip information, also
switches to kilometers or miles
depending on the selected
speedometer reading.
KM: The displayed measurement in

the trip computer and trip
information is set to kilometers.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
the selections. MILES: The displayed measurement completed, the display changes as
in the trip computer and trip shown above, and then goes back to
Select AUTO, KM, or MILES by information is set to miles. the customizable item screen.
then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘DISPLAY KM/MILES
the SEL/RESET button. SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message
appears, go back to ‘‘DISPLAY KM/
MILES’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
102
Meter Color Change

You can turn the ambient meter Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
feature on or off (see page 72 ). the selections. completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
You can choose this item to Select ON or OFF by pressing the the customizable item screen.
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the ‘‘METER COLOR CHANGE
repeatedly. RESET button. SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message
appears, go back to ‘‘METER
COLOR CHANGE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
103
Lighting Setup
There is one custom setting for the
lighting setup:
See page
INTERIOR LIGHT 105
DIMMING TIME
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is

shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/ See page

▼) button, the screen changes as 106
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
to enter your selection.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.

104
Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when you Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
close all doors. To change how long the selections. completed, the display changes as
the lights stay on before they fade shown above, and then goes back to
out, follow these instructions: Select the desired setting (15sec, the customizable item screen.
30sec, or 60sec) by pressing the
You can choose this item to INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING your selection by pressing the SEL/ message appears, go back to
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/ RESET button. ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
▼) button repeatedly. TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED
105
Auto Light Sensitivity

The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH −
somewhat bright. You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to see
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING the selections.
MID − SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
The headlights come on when it is as ▼) button repeatedly. Select the desired setting (MAX,
bright as sunset or sunrise. HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by
LOW − then enter your selection by pressing
The headlights come on when it is the SEL/RESET button.
somewhat dark.
MIN −
dark.
106

completed, the display changes as
the customizable item screen.

message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
107
Door Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER See page See page See page
109 110 112
While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/

▼) button, the screen changes as
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize, See page See page
then press the SEL/RESET button 115 114
to enter your selection. : Press the SEL/RESET button.
108
Auto Door Lock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move

the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEHICLE SPEED −

The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
16 km/h).
OFF − You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to
The auto door lock mode is customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by enter the selecting mode.
deactivated all the time. pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
CONTINUED
109
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ Auto Door Unlock

message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO There are five possible settings you
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the can choose from:
procedure again.
DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO P
− The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to Park with
the brake pedal depressed.
ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO P −

All the doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to Park with the brake
pedal depressed.
completed, the display changes as
the customizable item screen.
110
DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFF −

The driver’s door unlocks when you
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
(0) position.
ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF − All

the doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
OFF − The auto door unlock is

deactivated all the time.
You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to

customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by enter the selecting mode.
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button.
For example, you choose ‘‘DRIVER

DOOR with SHIFT to P,’’ you will
see the above display.
CONTINUED
111
Door Lock Mode
If you choose ‘‘ALL DOORS With When your selection is successfully

IGN OFF,’’ you will see the above completed, the display changes as To select whether the driver’s or all
display. shown above, and then goes back to doors unlock when you unlock the
the customizable item screen. doors with the remote transmitter or
Press the SEL/RESET button to the key, follow these instructions.
enter your selection. If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO You can choose this item to
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
procedure again. pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
112

message appears, go back to ‘‘DOOR
LOCK MODE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.

Press the SEL/RESET button to When your selection is successfully
enter the selecting mode. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by the customizable item screen.
113
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the hatch
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 223 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to

customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by enter the selecting mode.
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
114
Security Relock Timer

If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
any of the doors within 30 seconds,
the doors and the hatch,
automatically relock, and the

security system sets.
You can change this relock time

from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully You can choose this item to

completed, the display changes as customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
shown above, and then goes back to pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
the customizable item screen. repeatedly.

‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
115

‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
Press the SEL/RESET button to When your selection is successfully

enter the selecting mode. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by the customizable item screen.
116
DEFAULT ALL

If you want to set the default settings, To set the default settings, press the When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET see the above display for several
select DEFAULT ALL, then press then press the SEL/RESET button. seconds, then the screen returns to
the SEL/RESET button. the default all setting display.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the If the setting is not successfully
SEL/RESET button. The screen completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
goes back to the previous display. several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to SETUP. Repeat the
same procedure to select DEFAULT
ALL.
117
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB WINDSHIELD CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS＊2 (P.224)
(P.124) WIPERS/WASHERS MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS＊2 (P.76)
(P.119)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.120)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.147) NAVIGATION SYSTEM＊3/
AUDIO SYSTEM
REMOTE AUDIO (P.170)
CONTROL BUTTONS＊2
(P.219)
VEHICLE STABILITY HEATED MIRROR＊2
ASSIST (VSA) OFF (P.126/148)
SWITCH
(P.296)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE (P.157)
CONTROL BUTTONS＊3
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.220)
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE LINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS＊2 (P.227) HORN＊1 STEERING WHEEL MULTI-INFORMATION
ADJUSTMENTS(P.128) BUTTONS＊2 (P.76)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
118
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and

OFF − The wipers are not activated. hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
INT − The length of the wipe low speed, then complete one more
ADJUSTMENT RING interval is varied automatically sweep after you release the lever.
according to vehicle’s speed.
EX model is shown.
EX models
1. MIST The length of the wiper interval is
2. OFF varied automatically according to the
3. INT − Intermittent vehicle’s speed.
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed Vary the delay by turning the
6. Windshield washers adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay ( position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
119
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signals and Headlights
Rear Window Wiper and Washer 4. Rotate the switch Turn Signals and Headlights
counterclockwise also to spray the
window washer and turn the wiper
on.
When you shift the transmission to

the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
The rear window washer uses the

same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
1. OFF 1. Turn Signal
When you turn the wiper switch to 2. OFF
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will 3. Parking and interior lights
return to its parked position. 4. AUTO＊
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to 5. Headlights on
turn the rear window wiper ON. 6. High Beams
The wiper operates every 7 7. Flash high beams
seconds after completing two
sweeps. ＊: EX models
3. Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.
120
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the Headlights − Turning the switch to High Beams − Push the left lever
left lever to signal a left turn and up the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the forward until you hear a click. The
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane parking lights, taillights, instrument blue high beam indicator will come
change, push lightly on the lever and panel lights, side-marker lights, and on (see page 69 ). Pull the lever back
hold it. The lever will return to the rear license plate lights. to return to the low beams.
center when you release it or

complete a turn. Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ To flash the high beams, pull the
position turns on the headlights. lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
When the light switch is in the as you hold the lever back.
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave

the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
If you leave the lights on with the

key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
121
Headlights
On EX models Even with the automatic lighting

AUTO − The automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend
feature turns on the headlights, all that you turn on the lights manually
other exterior lights, and the when driving at night or in a dense
instrument panel lights when it fog, or when you enter dark areas
senses low ambient light. such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
To turn on the automatic lighting,
turn the light switch to the AUTO To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
position. The lights will come on SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
automatically when the outside light 106 .
level becomes low (at dusk, for LIGHT SENSOR
example). The lights on indicator
comes on as a reminder. The lights The automatic lighting feature is
and indicator turn off automatically controlled by a sensor located on top
when the system senses high of the dashboard. Do not cover this
ambient light. sensor or spill liquids on it.
The lights turn off automatically

when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position. To turn them
on again, either turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, or
turn the light switch to the
position.
122
Headlights
Daytime Running Lights

With the headlight switch off or in
the position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the

position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal

operation when you turn them on If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
with the switch. SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
123
Instrument Panel Brightness
To reduce glare at night, the

instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to the
or position. Turning the
knob to the right until you hear a
tone will cancel the reduced
brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate

with reduced brightness when you
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS unlock and open the driver’s door.
CONTROL KNOB BRIGHTNESS LEVEL The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
The knob on the instrument panel When you turn the knob, the multi- ignition switch, then go to normal
controls the brightness of the information display changes to brightness when you turn the
instrument panel lights. Turn the vertical bars that show you the ignition switch to the ON (II)
knob to adjust the brightness with current level. position.
the ignition switch in the ON (II)
position and the parking lights on. You will hear a tone when you reach
the maximum or minimum
brightness. The brightness level
goes out about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting.
124
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
If you do not insert the key in the Hazard Warning Button

ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.

If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
Push the button next to the audio

system to turn on the hazard
warning lights (four-way flashers).
This causes all four outside turn
signal lights and both turn signal
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
125
Rear Window Defogger
The defogger will shut itself off U.S. EX models and all Canadian models
within about 10 to 30 minutes Pushing this button also turns the
according to the outside temperature mirror heaters on or off. For more
(over 32°F, 0°C). information, see page 148 .
Make sure all rear windows are clear

and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on

the inside of all rear windows can be
U.S. EX model is shown. accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side-
The rear window defogger will clear to-side.
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
windows. Push the defogger button
to turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.
126
ECON Button
Press the ECON button to activate

ECON MODE INDICATOR the ECON mode. ECON ON will be
displayed on the multi-information
display and the ECON mode
indicator will illuminate in the
instrument panel. Press the ECON

button again to turn it off. ECON
OFF will appear on the multi-
When you turn off and then restart

the engine, the ECON mode setting
remains the same as previously set.
ECON BUTTON MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
The ECON button turns the ECON Engine performance will be

mode on and off. The ECON mode different
helps you improve your fuel The climate control system will
economy by modifying some vehicle have greater temperature
functions. When the ECON mode is fluctuations
on:
In addition, when the ECON mode is
on, you may get more Eco Assist
points (see page 266 ).
127
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel 3. Push the lever forward fully to

adjustments before you start driving. lock the steering wheel in position.
Make sure the lever is positioned

securely at the bottom of the
Adjusting the steering wheel To adjust steering column as shown.
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the 4. Make sure you have securely
vehicle and be seriously injured locked the steering wheel in place
in a crash. by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
LEVER
Adjust the steering wheel only To lock
when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Pull the lever under the steering
column toward you until it stops.
2. Move the steering wheel so it

points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
128
Keys and Locks
KEY IGNITION KEYS You should have received a key These keys contain electronic
NUMBER WITH REMOTE number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
TAG TRANSMITTER need this number if you ever have to immobilizer system. They will not
get a lost key replaced. Use only work to start the engine if the
Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

objects on them.
Two ignition keys come with your Keep the keys away from liquids.
vehicle. You should keep one of If they get wet, dry them
them in a safe place, away from the immediately with a soft cloth.
vehicle, as a spare.
They fit all the locks on your vehicle.
129
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine’s fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
system is disabled. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and
or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle inoperable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on operation.
briefly, then go off. If the indicator If you lose your key and you cannot
starts to blink, it means the system start the engine, contact your dealer. Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to the compliance could void the user’s
LOCK (0) position, remove the key, authority to operate the equipment.
reinsert it, and turn the ignition Always take the ignition key with you
switch to the ON (II) position again. whenever you leave the vehicle alone. This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
The system may not recognize your Operation is subject to the following two
key’s coding if another immobilizer conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key interference, and (2) this device must
chain) is near the ignition switch accept any interference that may cause
when you insert the key. undesired operation of the device.
130
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or ACCESSORY (I) − You can

remove the key only in this position. operate the audio system and the
To turn the key, the shift lever must accessory power sockets in this
be in Park, and you must push the position.
key in slightly.
If you leave the key in the ignition

If the front wheels are turned, the switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
anti-theft lock may make it difficult position and open the driver’s door,
to turn the key. Firmly turn the you will see a ‘‘RETURN IGNITION
steering wheel to the left or right as SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION’’
you turn the key. message on the multi-information
display and hear a reminder beeper.
The ignition switch has four If you turn the ignition key to the
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY ACCESSORY (I) position with the
(I), ON (II), and START (III). driver’s door closed, you will see an
‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’
message on the multi-information
display to inform you of the key
position.
CONTINUED
131
Ignition Switch
ON (II) − This is the normal key START (III) − Use this position
position when driving. Several of the only to start the engine. The switch
indicators on the instrument panel returns to the ON (II) position when
come on as a test when you turn the you let go of the key.
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) You will hear a reminder beeper if
position. you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’

display.
The shift lever must be in Park

before you can remove the key from
132
Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK TAB

All doors and the hatch can be
To unlock locked from the outside by using the
Lock key in the driver’s door. To unlock
only the driver’s door, insert the key,
turn it clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors and the hatch

Unlock unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
You can customize the door lock/

unlock settings (see page 108 ).
To lock
To lock all doors and the hatch, push The lock tab on each passenger’s
the front of the master door lock door locks and unlocks that door.
switch on the driver’s door, pull the
lock tab rearward on the driver’s When the door is unlocked, you can
door, or use the key on the outside see the red indicator on the lock tab
lock on the driver’s door. above the inner door handle.
Pushing the rear of the master door

lock switch will unlock all doors and
the hatch. Pushing forward the lock
tab on the driver’s door unlocks only
that door.
CONTINUED
133
Door Locks
To lock any passenger’s door when Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks
getting out of the vehicle, pull the If you forget and leave the key in the
lock tab rearward and close the door. ignition switch, lockout prevention
To lock the driver’s door, remove the will not allow you to lock the driver’s
key from the ignition switch, pull the door. With any door or the hatch Unlock
lock tab rearward or push the front open and the key in the ignition
of the master switch, then close the switch, locking with master door
door. lock switch is disabled. If the driver’s
door is closed, the lock tab on the Lock
Default setting driver’s door is not disabled. Pulling
When the vehicle speed reaches the driver’s lock tab rearward will
about 10 mph (U.S.)/15 km/h lock all doors and the hatch. If you
(Canada) or more, all the doors and try to lock an open driver’s door by LEVER
the hatch lock automatically. pulling the lock tab rearward, the
driver’s door lock tab pops out and The childproof door locks are
When you shift to P after driving, the unlocks the driver’s door. designed to prevent children seated
driver’s door unlocks. in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
134
Remote Transmitter
On LX and EX models The ceiling light and the door

LED LOCK BUTTON
If you press the LOCK button twice activated spotlights come on when
within 5 seconds, you will hear a you press the UNLOCK button if the
horn to verify that the security lights are in the door activated
system has set. position. If you do not open any door
or the hatch within 30 seconds (or

UNLOCK − Press this button once whatever setting of the interior light
to unlock the driver’s door (or all the dimming time is set to), the light(s)
doors and the hatch depending on will fade out. If you relock the doors
the door lock setting). Press it twice and the hatch with the remote
UNLOCK PANIC to unlock the remaining doors and transmitter before 30 seconds have
BUTTON BUTTON the hatch. Some exterior lights will elapsed, the light(s) will go off
flash twice when you press the immediately.
LOCK − Press this button once to button the first time.
lock all doors and the hatch. Some The keyless lock acknowledgment
exterior lights will flash once. When If you do not open any door or the beep and flashing of the lights can
you press LOCK twice within 5 hatch within 30 seconds, they will be deactivated (see page 114 ).
seconds, the horn will sounds to automatically relock, and the
verify that the doors are locked. You security system (if equipped) will To change the lock/unlock setting
cannot lock the doors if any door or reset. and the relock timer setting, refer to
the hatch is not fully closed or if the the customized settings on page 108 .
key is in the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
135
Remote Transmitter
PANIC − Press and hold this Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter
button for about 1 second to attract Avoid dropping or throwing the Battery
attention; the horn will sound, and transmitter. If it takes several pushes on the
the exterior lights will flash for about button to lock or unlock the doors,
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, Protect the transmitter from replace the battery as soon as
press any other button on the remote extreme temperatures. possible.
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic Do not immerse the transmitter in Battery type: CR1616
mode does not work when the key is any liquid.
in the ignition switch.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
136
Remote Transmitter
COIN
KEYPAD
BATTERY

SCREW
To replace the battery: 3. Place a cloth on the edge of the 4. Remove the old battery and note
1. Remove the screw at the base of keypad to prevent scratches, and the polarity. Make sure the
the transmitter with a small remove the upper half by carefully polarity of the new battery is the
Phillips-head screwdriver. prying on the edge with a coin. same (＋ side facing down), then
insert it in the keypad.
NOTE: Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the screw 5. Snap the two halves of the keypad,
can strip out. then install the parts in reverse
order.
2. Separate the keypad from the
transmitter by pushing any button
from outside.
CONTINUED
137
Remote Transmitter
An improperly disposed of battery As required by the FCC:

can hurt the environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the
Always confirm local regulations for FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
battery disposal. following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
138
Hatch
The hatch will lock or unlock when

INNER HANDLE
you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with the key, the remote transmitter,
the master door lock switch, or the
lock tab on the driver’s door.

To unlock the hatch, turn the key
clockwise twice, push the rear of the
master door lock switch, or push
UNLOCK twice on the remote
transmitter. RELEASE
To open the hatch, push the release, Keep the hatch closed at all times
and lift up. To close the hatch, use while driving to avoid damaging the
the handle to lower it, then press hatch and to prevent exhaust gas
down on the back edge. from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
56 .
139
Hatch
Unlocking the Hatch
COVER
Unlock
RELEASE LEVER
If the power door lock system cannot Push the release lever to the lower
unlock the hatch, unlock it manually. left as shown, and push the hatch to
open it.
Place a cloth on the top side of the
cover to prevent scratches, then use If you need to unlock the hatch
a small flat-tip screwdriver to remove manually, it means there is a
the cover on the back of the hatch. problem with the hatch. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
140
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment

See pages 14 − 15 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.

To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the The height of your driver’s seat is
outside of the seat bottom. adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, outside of the seat cushion. To lower
rock it back and forth to make sure it the seat, push the lever down
To adjust the seat forward or is locked in position. repeatedly.
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.
141
Seats
Head Restraints Front Position CUSHION

See page 16 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries. RELEASE
BUTTON
LEGS SEAT-BACK
They are most effective when you Adjusting the Head Restraint
adjust them so the center of the back The front and rear outer head
of the occupant’s head rests against restraints adjust for height. You
the center of the restraint. need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button and push the restraint
down.
142
Seats
Rear Outer Position Rear Center Position Removing the Head Restraint
CUSHION CUSHION To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.

For Rear Seat Head Restraints
The seat-back must be folded
RELEASE forward (see page 145 ) to get ceiling
RELEASE BUTTON clearance for removal of the head
BUTTON LEGS SEAT-BACK
LEGS SEAT-BACK restraints.
When a passenger is seated in the

rear center seating position, the
center head restraint should be
adjusted up or down, to match the
passenger’s height.
CONTINUED
143
Seats
Active Head Restraints against the likelihood of whiplash

and injuries to the neck and upper
Failure to reinstall, or correctly spine.
reinstall, the head restraints can
result in severe injury during a After a collision, the activated
crash. restraint should return to its normal
position.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving. If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
When reinstalling a head restraint, inspected by a Honda dealer.
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button. The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
Make sure the head restraint locks the vehicle is struck severely from
in position when you reinstall it. the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between

the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
144
Seats
For a head restraint system to work Folding the Rear Seats Down RED INDICATOR
properly: The rear seat-backs can be folded
down for more cargo room.
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint Each side folds down separately, so
legs. you can still carry one or two

passengers in the rear seat.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back. Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back,
Install each restraint in its proper and make sure there are no items on
location. the floor before folding down the LEVER
seats.
Only use genuine Honda 2. Unlock the seat-back by pulling up
replacement head restraints. 1. Lower the rear head restraints to the release lever on the outer side
their lowest positions. If you fold of each rear seat-back.
down the right side seat-back, also
adjust the rear center head 3. Fold the seat-back forward.
restraint to its lowest position.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
CONTINUED
145
Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the Make sure all items in the cargo area Armrest
seat-back to the upright position. Pull are secured. Loose items can fly
on the seat-back to make sure it is forward and cause injury if you have
latched. If the seat-back is not to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
latched fully, the seat belt will not on page 258 ).
work properly and you will see the
red indicator behind the release
lever as shown on the previous page.
Do not put any heavy items on the

seat-back when it is folded down.
Make sure the seat-back and seat

cushion are locked securely and all
rear shoulder belts are positioned in U.S. LX and EX models
front of the rear seat-backs. The lid of the console compartment
can be used as an armrest.
146
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to move the
UP mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the

TAB SELECTOR selector switch to the center (off)

SWITCH position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
DOWN ADJUSTMENT settings.
SWITCH
Daytime Position Night Position
Keep the inside and outside mirrors

clean and adjusted for best visibility. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before (II) position.
you start driving.
2. Move the selector switch to L
The inside mirror has day and night (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
positions. The night position reduces side).
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
147
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters This heated mirror function has a

timer (see page 126 ).
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
On U.S. EX models and all Canadian

models
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the rear window defogger
button. The indicator in the button
comes on as a reminder. Press the
button again to turn the heaters and
the defogger off.
148
Power Windows
MAIN SWITCH AUTO − To open or close the

driver’s window, push or pull the
Closing a power window on window switch firmly down or up to
someone’s hands or fingers can the second detent, and release it.
cause serious injury. The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the

Make sure your passengers are window, pull or push the window
away from the windows before switch briefly.
closing them.
DRIVER’S FRONT
WINDOW PASSENGER’S
SWITCH WINDOW SWITCH
Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
CONTINUED
149
Power Windows
When you push the main switch in, AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
the indicator comes on and the window senses any obstacle while it
passengers’ windows cannot be is closing automatically, it will
raised or lowered. Use the main reverse direction, and then stop. To
switch when you have children in the close the window, remove the
vehicle so they do not injure obstacle, then use the window switch
themselves by operating the again.
windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch Auto reverse stops sensing when the
again. The switch will pop out. window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
The windows and the main switch objects are away from the window
feature will operate for up to 10 before closing it.
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front NOTE: The driver’s window auto
door cancels this function. reverse function is disabled when
you continuously pull up the switch.
150
Parking Brake
PARKING BRAKE LEVER

If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display.

Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
EX model is shown. the vehicle is put into gear with the
parking brake on.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 63 ).
151
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK USB ADAPTER VANITY MIRROR＊ SUN VISOR

CABLE＊
REAR DOOR BEVERAGE
HOLDER FRONT DOOR CENTER POCKET
POCKET
CARGO AREA COVER＊
GLOVE BOX
FLOOR STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK/

ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
CARGO AREA UNDER FLOOR SEAT-BACK CENTER CONSOLE
STORAGES POCKETS＊ COMPARTMENT＊ CENTER TRAY＊/
CENTER POCKET＊
＊: If equipped BEVERAGE HOLDERS
152
Cargo Area Cover To retract the cover, slip the rods

out of the hooks and guide the cover
so it rolls back fully into its housing.
Do not store parcels on the cargo

area cover. The cover may break if

weight is placed on it.
HANDLE MOUNTING ROD
On Canadian EX model only To extend the cargo area cover, pull

You can use the cargo area cover to out the cover from the housing by
conceal your parcels and protect pulling the handle on the cover’s
them from direct sunlight. leading edge, then clip the mounting
rods in the slots at both sides of the
hatch opening.
CONTINUED
153
To reinstall the cargo area cover Storing the Cargo Area Cover
housing unit, place one end of the
unit in the holder on the side panel, CARGO AREA LID
then push it into the side panel COVER
slightly and insert the other end into
its holder.
Make sure the housing unit is

Push securely placed so it will not come
loose while you are driving.
HOUSING UNIT LID
The cargo area cover housing unit You can store the cargo area cover
can be removed to give you more under the cargo area floor.
cargo space.
1. Open the cargo floor lid.
Release each side of the housing unit
by pushing one end of the unit 2. Open the cargo area cover holder
toward the other end and lifting it lids located on both sides of the
upward. cargo area floor.
154
Under Floor Storages Floor Storage Compartments

CARGO AREA STORAGES CARGO FLOOR STRAP
COVER

LID
3. Store the cover in its holders as To open the cargo floor, fold the To use the storage compartment
shown in the illustration above. cargo floor forward. located on the left side of the cargo
area floor, hold the strap and raise
4. Reinstall the cargo floor lid. the lid.
Close the lid by pressing until it

latches.
155
Beverage Holders
FRONT FRONT REAR
BEVERAGE BEVERAGE
HOLDERS HOLDERS BEVERAGE HOLDERS
EX model Insight model and LX model Insight model and Canadian LX model
Be careful when you are using the

beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the front and rear door pocket
beverage holders when you open or
close the doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
156
Accessory Power Socket It will not power an automotive type Console Compartment
cigarette lighter element.
Make sure to put the socket cover

back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects from getting into the

socket.
LEVER
Your vehicle has an accessory power On EX and U.S. LX models

socket in the front console panel. To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the
To use an accessory power socket, armrest.
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
157
Glove Box Center Tray
An open glove box can cause PARTITION

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
Open the glove box by pulling the There is a tray in the front of the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm center console. You can also take the
push. partition out to extend the tray.
On EX models only When you use the front beverage

The glove box light comes on when holders, you need to put the partition
the parking lights are on. back to the original position on the
center console.
158
Center Pockets
KNOB

Push
LID
On EX models On all models

To open the center pocket, press the To open the center pocket, push on
release button. The lid will unlatch the knob. To close it, push the lid up
and swing up. To close it, push the until it latches.
lid down until it latches.
159
Coat Hook Sun Visors Vanity Mirror
COAT HOOK
EX model is shown.
To use a coat hook, slide it out To use the sun visor, pull it down. On U.S. EX models and Canadian
slightly, then pull it down. You can also use the sun visor at the models
side window. Remove the support To use the vanity mirror on the back
Make sure the coat hook is pulled up rod from the clip and swing the sun of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
when you are not using it. This hook visor toward the side window.
is not designed for large or heavy
items. Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
160
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light After all doors are closed tightly, the Spotlights
light dims slightly, then fades out in
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION about 30 seconds. SPOTLIGHTS
The ceiling light (with the switch in

the center position) comes on when

you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the Push
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds. Push
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT

DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page EX model with navigation system
105 .
The ceiling light has a three-position Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
switch: ON, Door Activated, and If you leave any door open without lens. Push the lens again to turn it
OFF. In the Door Activated (center) the key in the ignition switch, the off. You can use the spotlights at all
position, the light comes on when ceiling light will go off after about 15 times.
you: minutes.
Open any door.
Unlock the driver’s door with the

key or remote transmitter.
CONTINUED
161
Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light
SPOTLIGHTS
Push
Push
U.S. LX model CARGO AREA LIGHT
Your vehicle has a cargo area light

on the left side panel of the cargo
area. It comes on when you open the
hatch.
162
Features
The climate control system in your Climate Control System ................ 164
vehicle provides a comfortable Audio System ................................. 170
driving environment in all weather Insight model
conditions. Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 171
Playing a Disc ................................. 175
The standard audio system has Disc Player Error Messages ........ 182
many features. This section LX model and EX model without
describes those features and how to navigation system
Features
use them. Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 183
Playing a Disc ................................. 190
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Disc Player Error Messages ........ 196
system that requires a code number Playing an iPod ............................. 197
to enable it. iPod Error Messages .................. 203
Playing a USB Flash Memory
The security system helps to dis- Device ......................................... 204
courage vandalism and theft of your USB Flash Memory Device Error
vehicle. Messages .................................... 213
FM/AM Radio Reception ............. 214
Protecting Your Discs ................... 216
Remote Audio Controls................. 219
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 220
Radio Theft Protection.................. 221
Setting the Clock ........................... 222
Security System ............................. 223
Cruise Control ................................ 224
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 227
163
Climate Control System
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON FAN CONTROL BAR
MODE CONTROL BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
FRESH AIR BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST BUTTON
U.S. EX model and Canadian models

ON/OFF BUTTON REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
164
Voice Control System Using Automatic Climate Control During the auto idle stop, the air
On models with navigation system The automatic climate control conditioning system will be turned
The climate control system for your system in your vehicle maintains the off. If the ECON mode is selected,
vehicle can also be operated using interior temperature you select. The the fan may also be turned off.
the voice control system. See the system also adjusts the fan speed
navigation system manual for and airflow levels. Temperature Control
complete details. Turning this dial clockwise increases
1. Press the AUTO button. You will the temperature of the airflow.
Features
see AUTO in the display.
2. Set the desired temperature by

turning the temperature control
dial.
The system automatically selects

the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference.
CONTINUED
165
When you set the temperature to its ON/OFF Button Semi-automatic Operation
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit Each time you press this button, the You can manually select various
( ), the system runs at full climate control system switches functions of the climate control
cooling or heating only. It does not between on and off. Turning on the system when it is in fully automatic
regulate the interior temperature. system with this button selects your mode. All other features remain
last climate control selection. automatically controlled. Making any
When you adjust a fan control, the manual selection causes the word
fan is taken out of AUTO mode. To Turn Everything Off AUTO in the display to go out.
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button. Fan Control
Press the ▲ side of the bar to
Keep the system completely off increase the fan speed and airflow.
for short periods only. Press the ▼ side of the bar to
decrease them.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
166
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the air When the recirculation indicator is This button turns the rear window
conditioning on and off. You will see on, air from the vehicle’s interior is defogger on and off (see page 126 ).
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. sent throughout the system again.
On U.S. EX models and all Canadian
When you turn the A/C off, the Select recirculation mode when models
system cannot regulate the inside driving through dusty or smoky Pushing this button also turns the
temperature if you set the conditions, then return to fresh air power mirror heaters on and off.
Features
temperature control below the mode.
outside temperature.
Fresh Air Button
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
When the fresh air indicator is on,

air is brought in from the outside of
the vehicle.
The system should be left in fresh

air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
CONTINUED
167
Mode Control Windshield Defroster Button To remove fog from the inside of the
Use the mode control button to This button directs the main airflow windows, set as follows:
select the vents the air flows from. to the windshield for faster
Some air will flow from the defrosting. It also overrides any 1. Select . The system
dashboard vents in all modes. mode selection you may have made. automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Airflow is divided between When you select , the system 2. Adjust the temperature so the
the floor and corner vents and the automatically switches to fresh air airflow feels warm.
defroster vents at the base of the mode and turns on the A/C. For 3. Select to help clear the
windshield. faster defrosting, manually set the rear window.
fan speed to high. You can also 4. To increase airflow to the
Air flows from the floor increase airflow to the windshield by windshield, close the corner vents.
vents. closing the corner vents on the For faster defogging, manually set
dashboard. the fan speed to high.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the When you turn off by For your safety, make sure you have
floor vents. pressing the button again, the a clear view through all the windows
system returns to its former settings. before driving.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
168
Sunlight, Temperature, and

Humidity Sensors
Features
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Insight model and LX model EX models SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
To regulate the interior temperature

and humidity, the climate control
system has two sensors. A sunlight
sensor is located in the top of the
dashboard and a temperature/
humidity sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
169
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all Insight model LX and EX models without

models. Read the appropriate pages navigation system
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
For Insight model, see pages

171 through 182 .
For LX and EX models without

navigation system, see pages
183 through 213 .
For EX model with navigation

system, see navigation system
manual for how to operate the audio
system.
170
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)
AM FM
BUTTON BUTTON
Features
POWER/ TUNE KNOB
VOLUME
KNOB
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BUTTONS
171
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station SCAN − The scan function samples
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to all stations with strong signals on the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected selected band. To activate it, press
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset the right side of the A. SEL/SCAN
power/volume knob or the AM or buttons, and auto select. bar, then release it. You will see
FM button. Adjust the volume by SCAN in the display. The system will
turning the power/volume knob. TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to scan for a station with a strong signal.
tune the radio to a desired frequency. When it finds one, it will stop and
The band and frequency that the Turn the knob to the right to tune to play that station for about 10 seconds.
radio was last tuned to is displayed. a higher frequency, and turn it to the
To change bands, press the AM or left to tune to a lower frequency. If you do nothing, the system will
FM button. On the FM band, ST will then scan for the next strong station
be displayed if the station is broad- SEEK/SKIP − The seek function and play it for 10 seconds. When it
casting in stereo. Stereo searches up and down from the plays a station you want to listen to,
reproduction on AM is not available. current frequency to find a station press the SCAN side of the bar again.
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
172
Preset − Each preset button can AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations auto
store one frequency on AM and two traveling and can no longer receive select has stored, you can store
frequencies on FM. your preset stations, you can use the other frequencies on the preset
auto select feature to find stations in buttons as previously described.
1. Select the desired band, AM or the local area.
FM. You can store one frequency To turn off auto select, press the
on FM1, and one frequency on Press the left side of the A. SEL side of the bar. This restores
FM2 with each preset button. A. SEL/SCAN bar. You will see the presets you originally set.
Features
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan the system goes into scan mode for For information on AM/FM radio
function to tune the radio to a several seconds. It stores the frequencies and reception, see page
desired station. frequencies of six AM, and twelve 214 .
FM stations in the preset buttons.
3. Pick a preset button (1−6), then
press and hold it until you hear a You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
beep. pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a every preset button.
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
173
Adjusting the Sound SVC − Adjusts the volume level Speed-sensitive Volume
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob based on the vehicle speed. Compensation (SVC)
repeatedly to display the BASS, The SVC mode controls the volume
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and Each mode is shown in the display as based on vehicle speed. The faster
SVC (speed-sensitive volume it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to you go, the louder the audio volume
compensation) settings. adjust the setting to your liking. becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
BASS − Adjusts the bass. Except SVC adjustment
When the level reaches the center, The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back Wait a few seconds and the display adjust the setting to your liking. If
strength of the sound. returns to normal. you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to- too quiet, choose high.
side strength of the sound.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 124 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
174
Playing a Disc (Insight model)
CD/AUX EJECT RANDOM BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON
Features
LOAD
INDICATOR
POWER/VOLUME TUNE KNOB
KNOB
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR DISP BUTTON
175
To Play a Disc This audio system can also play Depending on the software the files
To load or play a disc, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in were made with, it may not be
switch must be in the ACCESSORY MP3 or WMA formats. When possible to play some files, or display
(I) or ON (II) position. playing a disc in MP3, you will see some text data.
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
You operate the disc player with the format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
same controls used for the radio. To display. You can select up to 99
select the disc player, press the CD/ folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
AUX button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display. NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. displays FORMAT, and then skips to
The label can curl up and cause the the next file.
disc to jam in the unit.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
176
To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function The display shows up to 10

Insert a disc about halfway into the Each time you press the DISP button, characters of selected text data (the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc the display shows you the text data folder name, file name, etc.). If the
in the rest of the way to play it. You on a disc, if the disc was recorded text data has more than 10
operate the disc player with the with text data. characters, you will see the first 9
same controls used for the radio. characters and the ＞ indicator in
The number of the current track is You can see the album, artist, and the display. Press and hold the DISP
shown in the display. When playing a track name in the display. If a disc is button until the next 10 characters
Features
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can are shown.
of the current folder and file are see the folder and file name, and the
shown. The system will continuously album, artist, and track tag.
play a disc until you change modes.
With the folder name, you will see
You cannot load and play 3-inch the FOLDER indicator in the display.
(8-cm) discs in this system. The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
CONTINUED
177
You will also see some text data When playing a CD-DA with text To Change or Select Tracks/Files
under these conditions: data, the album and track name are You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
shown in the display. With a disc in while a disc is playing to select
When a new folder, file, or track is MP3 or WMA, the display shows the passages and change tracks (files in
selected. folder and file name. MP3/WMA mode).
When you change the audio mode SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
to play a disc with text data or in press and release the side of
MP3 or WMA. the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
When you insert a disc, and the track (file in MP3 or WMA mode).
system begins to play. Press and release the side, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press

and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
178
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode RANDOM (Random within a

FOLDER SELECTION − To FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, disc) − This feature plays the
select a different folder, turn the when activated, replays all files in tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
TUNE knob to move to the the selected folder in the order they or WMA mode) in random order. To
beginning of the next folder. Turn are compressed. To activate folder activate random play, press and
the knob to the right to skip to the repeat, press the RPT button twice. release the RDM button. In MP3 or
next folder, and to the left to move to You will see F-RPT in the display. WMA mode, press the RDM button
the beginning of the current folder. The system continuously replays the repeatedly to select RDM (within a
Features
Turn it again to skip to the beginning current folder. Press the RPT button disc random play). You will see
of the previous folder. Turning the again to turn it off. Pressing the ‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press the
TUNE knob more than one click RDM button, or selecting a different RDM button for 2 seconds to return
skips several folders at a time. folder with the TUNE knob also to normal play.
turns off the repeat feature.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay Each time you press and release the
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode), RPT button, the mode changes from
press and release the RPT button. file repeat to folder repeat, then to
You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display. normal play.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
CONTINUED
179
In MP3 or WMA mode SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER-RANDOM − This The scan function samples all tracks F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, plays all (files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in feature, when activated, samples the
files on the selected folder in random the order they are recorded on the first file of each folder on the disc.
order. To activate folder random, disc. To activate scan, press and To activate folder scan, press the
press the RDM button. You will see release the SCAN bar. You will see SCAN bar twice. You will see
F-RDM in the display. The system SCAN in the display. You will get a F-SCAN in the display.
will then select and play files 10 second sampling of each track/
randomly. This continues until you file on the disc. Press and hold the The system plays the first file in the
deactivate folder random by pressing SCAN button for about 2 seconds to first folder for about 10 seconds. If
and holding the RDM button for 2 get out of scan mode and play the you do nothing, the system will then
seconds. last track/file sampled. play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
Each time you press and release the Pressing either side of the SEEK/ file in the last folder, the system
RDM button, the mode changes SKIP bar also turns off the scan plays normally.
from folder random play to random feature.
play (within a disc random play), Pressing either side of the SEEK/
then to normal play. SKIP bar, selecting a different folder
with the TUNE knob, or pressing the
SCAN bar, also turns off folder scan.
Each time you press and release the

SCAN bar, the mode changes from
scan to folder scan, then to normal
play.
180
To Stop Playing a Disc If you turn the system off while a

Press the eject button ( ) to disc is playing, either with the
remove the disc. If you eject the disc, power/volume knob or by turning
but do not remove it from the slot, off the ignition switch, the disc will
the system will automatically reload stay in the drive. When you turn the
the disc after 10 seconds and put it in system back on, the disc will begin
pause mode. To begin playing, press playing where it left off.
the CD/AUX button.
Features
Protecting Discs
You can also eject the disc when the For information on how to handle
ignition switch is off. and protect compact discs, see page
216 .
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD/AUX button again to
switch back to the disc player.
181
Disc Player Error Messages (Insight model)
If you see an error message in the

display while playing a disc, find the Error Message Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take CD FORMAT Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
your vehicle to your dealer. supported supported track or file plays automatically.
The chart on the right explains the BAD DISC Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
error messages you may see in the CHECK MANUAL Mechanical Error Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
display while playing a disc. PUSH EJECT deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
If you see an error message in the see page 217. Insert the disc again. If the code
display while playing a disc, press BAD DISC Servo Error does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
the eject button. After ejecting the CHECK MANUAL removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
disc, check it for damage or force the disc out of the player.
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again. The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 217 .
The audio system will try to play the

disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
182
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
BUTTON
Features
PRESET BUTTONS
VOL/SELECT KNOB BUTTON
FM/AM BUTTON A.SEL BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK BUTTON SEEK BUTTON
BUTTON
183
To Play the FM/AM Radio TUNE − Use the SEEK button to SEEK − The SEEK function
The ignition switch must be in the tune to a desired frequency. Press searches up and down from the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. the button to tune to a higher current frequency to find a station
Turn the system on by pushing the frequency, and the button to with a strong signal. To activate it,
FM/AM button. Adjust the volume tune to a lower frequency. press and hold the or side
by turning the VOL/SELECT knob. of the SEEK button until you hear a
You can also operate the tune beep, then release it.
The band and frequency that the function by using the VOL/SELECT
radio was last tuned to are displayed. knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob SCAN − The scan function samples
To change bands, press the FM/AM and you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display. all stations with strong signals on the
button. On the FM band, ST will be Turn the knob right to tune to a selected band. To activate it, press
displayed if the station is higher frequency, or left to tune to a the SCAN button, then release it.
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo lower frequency. To turn it off, press You will see SCAN in the display.
reproduction in AM is not available. the VOL/SELECT knob or When the system finds a strong
button, or button. signal, it will stop and play that
To Select a Station The system will return to the normal station for about 10 seconds.
You can use any of five methods to display about 10 seconds after you
find radio stations on the selected stop adjusting the tune mode. If you do nothing, the system will
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset then scan for the next strong station
buttons, and auto select. and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
184
Preset − Each preset button can AUTO SELECT − If you are You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
store one frequency on AM and two traveling and can no longer receive pressing a preset button if auto
frequencies on FM. your preset stations, you can use the select cannot find a strong station for
auto select feature to find stations in that preset button.
1. Select the desired band, AM or the local area.
FM. If you do not like the stations auto
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’ select has stored, you can store
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan flashes in the display, and the system other frequencies on the preset
Features
function to tune the radio to a goes into scan mode for several buttons as previously described.
desired station. seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in To turn off auto select, press the
3. Pick a preset button (1−6), then the preset buttons. A. SEL button. This restores the
press and hold it until you hear a presets you originally set.
beep.
For information on FM/AM radio
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a frequencies and reception, see page
total of six stations on AM and 214 .
twelve stations on FM.
185
Radio Data System (RDS) If the station you are listening to is

On the FM band, you can select a not an RDS station, the display
favorite station and display the continues to show the frequency
program service name provided by with the PS name display function on.
the radio data system (RDS).
When you turn off this function by
Program Service (PS) Name Display pressing the TITLE button, the
The program service name display display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. You can PROGRAM SERVICE
turn this function on or off. NAME DISPLAY ON
To switch the function between on

and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
display shows the station name.
186
Radio Data System (RDS) Category ALL PTY: All RDS category stations Press or button to
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft select an RDS category. The display
rock music shows the selected RDS category
COUNTRY: Country music name for about 10 seconds. You can
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music use the search or scan function to
TOP 40: Top 40 hits find radio stations in the selected
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies RDS category. If you do nothing
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft while the RDS category name is
Features
rhythm and blues displayed, the selected category is
RELIGION: Programs concerned canceled.
RDS CATEGORY with religion.
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
With the FM band selected, you can talk shows, foreign language,
select the program category personality, public, college, and
provided by the RDS. Press weather
or button to display TRAFFIC: Traffic information
and select an RDS category. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows;
CONTINUED
187
RDS Program Search RDS Program SCAN If the system does not find a station,
This function searches a frequency The scan function samples all ‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
for a strong signal from the stations with strong signals on the seconds, then the system goes back
frequency that carry the selected selected RDS category. To activate it, to the last selected station.
RDS category information. This can press and release the SCAN button.
help you to find a station in your You will see SCAN in the display. You can use the RDS program
favorite category. To activate it, The system will scan for a station search or scan function even if the
press the or side of the with a strong signal in the selected RDS information display function is
SEEK button. You will see the RDS category. You will also see the off. In this case, the display shows a
selected RDS category name selected RDS category name frequency in place of a RDS station
blinking while searching it. When blinking while searching it. When it name.
the system finds a station, the finds a strong signal, it will stop and
selected RDS category name will be play that station for about 10 seconds.
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
If the system does not find a station, scan for the next strong station and
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
seconds, then the system goes back a station that you want to listen to,
to the last selected station. press the SCAN button again.
188
Adjusting the Sound SVC − Adjusts the volume level Audio System Lighting
Press the sound ( ) button to based on the vehicle speed. You can use the instrument panel
select an appropriate setting: bass, brightness control knob to adjust the
treble, fader, balance, and SVC Wait 10 seconds and the display illumination of the audio system (see
(speed-sensitive volume returns to normal. page 124 ). The audio system
compensation). Turn the VOL/ illuminates when the parking lights
SELECT knob to adjust the setting. Speed-sensitive Volume are on, even if the system is turned
Compensation (SVC) off.
Features
BAS − Adjusts the bass. The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back audio volume decreases.
strength of the sound.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to- SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
side strength of the sound. HIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob
to adjust the setting to your liking. If
Each mode is shown in the display as you feel the sound is too loud,
it changes. Turn the VOL/SELECT choose low. If you feel the sound is
knob to adjust the setting to your too quiet, choose high.
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
189
Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
BUTTON BUTTON EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON DISC SLOT
RDM BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON RPT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK BUTTON SEEK BUTTON
BUTTON
190
To Play a Disc This audio system can also play If you have a disc that is a
You operate the in-dash disc player CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in combination of CD-DA tracks and
with the same controls used for the MP3 or WMA formats. The numbers MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
radio. To select the disc player, press of the folder and track playing are format to listen by pressing the CD
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in shown in the display on the disc button.
the display. The folder or track player. A disc can support more than
numbers are shown in the display. 99 folders, and each folder can hold Video CDs and DVDs will not work
You can also select the displayed more than 255 playable files. A disc in this unit.
Features
information with the TITLE button can hold up to 999 files in total.
(see page 192 ). The system will A disc compressed in AAC format
continuously play a disc until you When there are more than 99 folders cannot be played in this audio
change modes. in a disc, the audio display only system.
shows two digits.
Depending on the software the files
NOTE: were made with, it may not be
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. If a file on a WMA disc is protected possible to play some files, or display
The label can curl up and cause the by digital rights management some text data.
disc to jam in the unit. (DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.
CONTINUED
191
To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function The display shows up to 16

Insert a disc about halfway into the Each time you press the TITLE characters of selected text data (the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc button, the display shows you the folder name, file name, etc.).
in the rest of the way to play it. You text, if the disc was recorded with
operate the disc player with the text data. If the text data has more than 16
same controls used for the radio. characters, you will see the first 15
The number of the current track is You can see the album, artist, and characters and the ＞ indicator on
shown in the display. When playing a track name in the display. If a disc is the display. Press and hold the
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can TITLE button until the next 16
of the current folder and file are see the folder and file name, and the characters are shown. You can see
shown. The system will continuously album, artist, and track tag. up to 31 characters of text data.
play a disc until you change modes.
With the folder name, you will see
You cannot load and play 3-inch the FOLDER indicator in the display.
(8-cm) discs in this system. The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page When you press and release the
216 . TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
192
If you press and hold the TITLE To Change or Select Tracks/Files SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
button again, the display shows the You can use the SEEK button while press and release the side, the
first 15 characters again. a disc is playing to change tracks player skips forward to the
(files in MP3/WMA mode). beginning of the next track (files in
If any letter is not available, it is MP3/WMA mode). Press and
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display. In MP3/WMA mode, use the release the side to skip
When the disc has no text data, you or button to select backward to the beginning of the
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display. folders in the disc, and use the SEEK current track. Press it again to skip
Features
button to change files. to the beginning of the previous
You will also see some text data track.
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is To move rapidly within a track, press
selected. and hold the , or the
button.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in You can also operate the track
MP3 or WMA. selection by using the VOL/SELECT
knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob
When you insert a disc, and the and you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.
system begins to play. Turn the knob to switch the track
number. Press the VOL/SELECT
When playing a CD-DA with text knob or button to set your
data, the album and track name are selection. To turn it off, press the
shown in the display. With a disc in button.
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name. CONTINUED
193
In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, FOLDER-RANDOM − This
select a different folder, press the when activated, replays all the files feature, when activated, plays the
or button. Press the in the selected folder in the order files in the current folder in random
button to skip to the next they are compressed in MP3/WMA. order, rather than in the order they
folder, and the button to skip To activate folder repeat mode, press are compressed in MP3/WMA. To
to the previous folder. the RPT button repeatedly until you activate folder random play, press
see F-RPT in the display. The system the RDM button. You will see
You can also operate the folder and continuously replays the current F-RDM in the display. The system
file selection by using the VOL/ folder. Press and hold the RPT will then select and play files
SELECT knob. Press the VOL/ button to turn it off. randomly. This continues until you
SELECT knob and you will see deactivate folder random play by
‘‘SEL’’ in the display. Turn the knob Each time you press and release the pressing and holding the RDM
to switch the folder number and RPT button, the mode changes from button.
press the knob to set your selection. file repeat to folder repeat, then to
To turn it off, press the normal play. Each time you press and release the
button repeatedly. RDM button, the mode changes
RANDOM (Random within a from folder random play, to within a
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE disc) − This feature plays the disc random play, then to normal
REPEAT) − To continuously replay tracks within a disc in random order. play.
a track (file in MP3/WMA mode), In MP3/WMA mode, all files in all
press and release the RPT button. folders are played in random order.
You will see RPT in the display. To activate random mode, press the
Press and hold the RPT button to RDM button repeatedly until you see
turn it off. RDM in the display. Press and hold
the RDM button to turn it off.
194
SCAN − The SCAN function In MP3/WMA mode To Stop Playing a Disc

samples all the tracks on the disc in FOLDER-SCAN − This feature, Press the eject button ( ) to
the order they are recorded on the when activated, samples the first file remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
disc (all files in the current folder in in each folder on the disc in the but do not remove it from the slot,
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the order they are recorded. To activate the system will automatically reload
scan feature, press and release the the folder scan feature, press the the disc after 10 seconds and begin
SCAN button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ SCAN button repeatedly. You will playing.
in the display. You will get a 10 see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display. The
Features
second sampling of each track/file in system will then play the first file in Press the FM/AM button to switch
the disc/folder. Press and hold the the main folders for about 10 to the radio while a disc is playing.
SCAN button to get out of scan seconds. When it plays a file that you To play the disc, press the CD button.
mode and play the last track sampled. want to continue listening to, press
and hold the SCAN button. When If you turn the system off while a
the system samples the first file of disc is playing, either with the
all folders, F-SCAN is canceled, and ( ) button or by turning off the
the system plays normally. ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
Each time you press and release the back on, the disc will begin playing
SCAN button, the mode changes where it left off.
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play. Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
216 .
195
Disc Player Error Messages (LX model and EX model without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Message Cause Solution
display while playing a disc.
UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
If you see an error message in the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
display while playing a disc, press Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
the eject button. After ejecting the BAD DISC Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
disc, check it for damage or PLEASE CHECK deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
deformation. If there is no damage, OWNERS Mechanical Error (see page 217). Insert the disc again. If the code
insert the disc again. MANUAL does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
For the additional information on PUSH EJECT removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
damaged discs, see page 217 . force the disc out of the player.
FOCUS Error Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
The audio system will try to play the Make sure it is inserted correctly in the disc
disc. If there is still a problem, the CHECK DISC player.
error message will reappear. Press TOC Error Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
the eject button, and pull out the disc. For more information, see page 217.
Insert a different disc. If the new

disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
196
Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
iPod INDICATOR AUX BUTTON
USB INDICATOR BUTTON
Features
BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
SEEK (SKIP − ) BUTTON SEEK (SKIP ＋ ) BUTTON
BUTTON
197
To Play an iPod iPod models confirmed to be NOTE:

This audio system can play the audio compatible with your audio system Do not connect your iPod using a
files on the iPod with the same using the USB adapter cable are: hub.
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to Model Do not keep the iPod in the
the USB adapter cable in the console iPod classic 80/160 G vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
compartment by using your dock iPod classic 120 G heat will damage it.
connector, then press the AUX iPod classic 160 G (launch in 2009)
button. The ignition switch must be iPod (5th generation) Do not use an extension cable
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) iPod nano between the USB adapter cable
position. The iPod will also be iPod touch equipped with your vehicle and
recharged with the ignition switch in your dock connector.
these positions. This system may not work with all
software versions of these devices. We recommend backing up your
The system will only play songs data before playing it.
stored on the iPod with iTunes.
Some devices cannot be powered
iPod and iTunes are registered or charged via the USB adapter. If
trademarks owned by Apple Inc. this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
198
Connecting an iPod If the iPod indicator does not appear

in the audio display, check the
USB CONNECTOR connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
USB ADAPTER
CABLE If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
Features
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
USB ADAPTER CABLE DOCK CONNECTOR
1. Unclip the USB connector by 2. Connect your dock connector to

pivoting it, and pull out the USB the iPod correctly and securely.
adapter cable in the console
compartment. 3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
CONTINUED
199
Text Data Display Function The display shows up to 16 To Change or Select Files
Each time you press the TITLE characters of the selected data. If the Use the SKIP button while an iPod is
button the display mode switches text data has more than 16 playing to change files.
between the album name, the song characters, you will see the first 15
name, the artist name, or name off characters and the ＞ indicator in SKIP − Each time you press the
(which turns off the text display). the display. Press and hold the (SKIP ＋) button, the system
TITLE button until the next 16 skips forward to the beginning of the
characters are shown. next file. Press the (SKIP −)
button, to skip backward to the
beginning of the current file. Press it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press

and hold either side ( or )
of the SKIP button.
200
The display shows items on the To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

selected list. Turn the VOL/ You can select any type of repeat and
SELECT knob to select an item, then shuffle mode by using the RPT
press the VOL/SELECT knob to set button or the RDM button.
your selection.
Press the REPEAT − This feature
VOL/SELECT knob. If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files continuously plays a file. To activate
on the selected list are played. the repeat feature, press the RPT
Features
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
Pressing the button goes back display. To turn it off, press the RPT
to the previous display and pressing button again.
the TITLE button cancels this
setting mode. SHUFFLE ALL − This feature
You can also select a file from any plays all available files in a selected
list on the iPod menu: playlists, list (playlists, artists, albums or
artists, albums and songs, by using songs) in random order. To activate
the VOL/SELECT knob. Push the the shuffle all feature, press the
VOL/SELECT knob to switch the RDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in
display to an iPod menu, then turn the display. To turn it off, press and
the VOL/SELECT knob to select a hold the RDM button.
desired list. Press the VOL/SELECT
knob to set your selection.
CONTINUED
201
SHUFFLE ALBUM − This feature To Stop Playing Your iPod If you reconnect the same iPod, the
plays all available albums in a To play the radio when an iPod is system may begin playing where it
selected list (playlists, artists, albums playing, press the FM/AM button. If left off, depending on what mode the
or songs) in random order. The files a disc is in the audio unit, press the iPod is in when it is reconnected.
in each album are played in the CD button to play the disc.
recorded order. To activate the When you disconnect the iPod while
shuffle album feature, press the Disconnecting an iPod it is playing, the display shows ‘‘USB
RDM button repeatedly. You will see You can disconnect the iPod at any NO DATA.’’
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn it time when you see the ‘‘OK to
off, press and hold the RDM button. disconnect’’ message＊ in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
Each time you press the RDM the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
button, the mode changes from the iPod display before you
shuffle all play to shuffle album play, disconnect it. Make sure to follow
then to normal play. the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
＊: The displayed message may

vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
202
iPod Error Messages (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the

audio display while playing an iPod, Error Message Cause Solution
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error USB ERROR USB ROM Error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
message, take your vehicle to your BAD USB Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
dealer. DEVICE Appears when an system off, and turn it on again. Do not
PLEASE CHECK incompatible device is reconnect the device that caused the error.
OWNERS connected
Features
MANUAL
iPod NO SONG No files in iPod Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
UNSUPPORTED Use of unsupported connected. See page 198 for the specification
VER. iPod information for iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
CONNECT RETRY Recognition failure of Appears when the system dose not
iPod acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
203
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
BUTTON
USB INDICATOR AUX BUTTON
BUTTON
VOL/SELECT BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
SEEK (SKIP − ) SEEK (SKIP ＋ )

BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTON
204
To Play a USB Flash Memory The audio system reads and plays The recommended USB flash
Device the audio files on the USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or
This audio system can operate the memory device in MP3, WMA or higher, and formatted with the FAT
audio files on a USB flash memory AAC＊ formats. Depending on the file system. Some digital audio
device with the same controls used format, the display shows MP3, players may be compatible as well.
for the in-dash disc player. To play a WMA or AAC when a USB flash Some USB flash memory devices
USB flash memory device, connect it memory device is playing. (such as devices with security lock-
to the USB adapter cable in the out features, etc.) will not work in
Features
console compartment, then press the ＊: Only AAC format files recorded this audio unit.
AUX button. with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
CONTINUED
205
NOTE: Do not keep a USB flash memory Depending on the software the
Do not use a device such as a card device in the vehicle. Direct files were made with, it may not be
reader or hard drive as the device sunlight and high heat will damage possible to play some files, or
or your files may be damaged. it. display some text data.
Do not connect your USB flash We recommend backing up your Depending on the type of
memory device using a hub. data before playing a USB flash encoding and writing software
memory device. used, there may be cases where
Do not use an extension cable to character information does not
the USB adapter cable equipped Some devices cannot be powered display properly.
with your vehicle. or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Depending on the type and

number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
206
Connecting a USB Flash Memory When the USB flash memory device
Device is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.
USB CONNECTOR
Features
USB ADAPTER CABLE USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Unclip the USB connector by 2. Connect the USB flash memory

pivoting it, and pull out the USB device to the USB connector
adapter cable in the console correctly and securely.
compartment.
CONTINUED
207
Text Data Display Function FOLDER SELECTION − To To Change or Select Files

Each time you press the TITLE select a different folder, press the Use the SKIP button while a USB
button, the display mode shows you button or button. flash memory device is playing to
in sequence, the folder name, the file Press the button to skip to change files.
name, the artist name, the album the next folder, and press the
name, the song name, or name off button to skip to the SKIP − Each time you press the
(which turns off the text display). beginning of the previous folder. (SKIP ＋) button, the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
The display shows up to 16 next file. Press the (SKIP −)
characters of the selected data. If the button, to skip backward to the
text data has more than 16 beginning of the current file. Press it
characters, you will see the first 15 again to skip to the beginning of the
characters and the ＞ indicator in previous file.
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16 To move rapidly within a file, press
characters are shown. and hold either side ( or )
of the SKIP button.
208
To Select a File from Folder and File Pressing the button goes back To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Lists to the previous display and pressing Mode:
the TITLE button cancels this You can select any type of repeat,
setting mode. random and scan modes by using the
Folder Selection RPT button, RDM button, or SCAN
button.
Features
Press the
VOL/SELECT knob.
Track Selection
You can also select a folder or file by

using the VOL/SELECT knob. Push
the VOL/SELECT knob to switch
the display to the folder or file list,
then turn the VOL/SELECT knob to
select a folder or file. Press the
VOL/SELECT knob to set your
selection.
CONTINUED
209
REPEAT − This feature FOLDER REPEAT − This feature RANDOM − This feature plays all
continuously plays a file. To activate replays all the files in the selected the files in random order. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT folder in the order they are stored. the track random feature, press the
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the To activate the folder repeat feature, RDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in
display. To turn it off, press and hold press the RPT button repeatedly. the display. To turn it off, press and
the RPT button. You will see ‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display. hold the RDM button.
To turn it off, press and hold the
RPT button.

RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
210
FOLDER RANDOM − This SCAN − This feature samples all FOLDER SCAN − This feature
feature plays the files in the current files in the current folder in the samples the first file in each folder in
folder in random order. To activate order they are stored. To activate the order they are stored. To
the folder random feature, press the the scan feature, press the SCAN activate the folder scan feature,
RDM button repeatedly. You will see button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the press the SCAN button repeatedly.
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn it display. You will get a 10 second You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.
off, press and hold the RDM button. sampling of each file in the folder. You will get a 10 second sampling of
Press and hold the SCAN button to the first file in each folder. Press and
Features
Each time you press the RDM get out of the scan mode and play hold the SCAN button to get out of
button, the mode changes from track the last file sampled. the folder scan mode and play the
random, play to folder random play, last file sampled.
then to normal play.
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
211
To Stop Playing a USB Flash Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory

Memory Device Device
To play the radio when a USB flash You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device is playing, press the memory device at any time even if
FM/AM button. If a disc is in the the USB mode is selected on the
audio unit, press the CD button to audio system. Always follow the USB
play the disc. flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash

memory device while it is playing,
the display shows ‘‘USB NO DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same USB flash

memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
212
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the

audio display while playing a USB Error Message Cause Solution
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If USB ERROR USB ROM Error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
you cannot clear the error message, BAD USB Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
take your vehicle to your dealer. DEVICE Appears when an system off, and turn it on again. Do not
PLEASE CHECK incompatible device is reconnect the device that caused the error.
OWNERS connected
Features
MANUAL
Appears when the files in the USB flash
UNPLAYABLE Use of unsupported memory device are DRM or an unsupported
FILE files format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
No files in USB flash empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
USB NO SONG memory device in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
Use of unsupported connected. See page 205 for the specification
UNSUPPORTED USB flash memory information for the USB flash memory device.
device If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
213
FM/AM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
214
FM/AM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing

vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:

Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
215
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
system. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
Handle your discs properly to can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
inner and outer edges with the side tip pens, can cause the disc to not
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. of a pencil or pen. play properly, or possibly jam in the
The label can curl up and cause the drive.
disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
216
Additional Information on 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Features
Examples of these discs are shown Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
to the right:
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
CONTINUED
217
4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape Audio unit may not play the
Fingerprints, scratches, etc. following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due

to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape Arrow Shape
218
Remote Audio Controls
CH BUTTON The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a disc, iPod or USB
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top flash memory device, the system
or bottom of the button and hold it skips to the beginning of the next
until the desired volume is reached, track (file in MP3, WMA or AAC
then release it. format) each time you press the top
(＋) of the CH button. Press the
The MODE button changes the bottom (−) to return to the
mode. Pressing the button beginning of the current track/file.
Features
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, Press it twice to return to the
disc or a PC card (if a disc or a PC previous track/file.
card is loaded), or an audio unit
VOL BUTTON MODE BUTTON connected to the auxiliary input jack You will see the track/file number
or the USB adapter cable. and the elapsed time. If the disc has
On U.S. LX model and EX models text data or is compressed in MP3 or
Three controls for the audio system If you are listening to the radio, use WMA, you can also see any other
are mounted in the steering wheel the CH button to change stations. information (track title, file name,
hub. These let you control basic Each time you press the top (＋) of folder name, etc.).
functions without removing your the button, the system goes to the
hand from the wheel. next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station. If you press and hold the CH
button (＋) or (−), the system goes
into the seek mode. It finds a station
with a strong signal.
CONTINUED
219
Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use Auxiliary Input Jack

the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top (＋) of the
CH button until you hear a beep to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
If you are playing a PC card, press

the top (＋) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the On Insight model and EX model with On LX model and EX model without
previous file. navigation system navigation system
Your vehicle has the auxiliary input

jack on the front panel. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories using a
1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.
When a compatible audio unit is

connected to the jack, press the CD/
AUX (on vehicles with navigation
system) or AUX (on vehicles without
navigation system) button to select it.
220
Radio Theft Protection
If your vehicle’s battery is unsuccessful in ten attempts, you Canadian owners

disconnected or goes dead, the audio must then leave the system on for If you lose the Anti-theft
system disables itself. If this happens, one hour before trying again. Identification Card, you must obtain
you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the the code from your dealer. To do this,
frequency display next time you turn The system will retain your AM and you will need the audio system’s
on the system. Use the preset bars FM presets even if power is serial number. If you do not have the
(icons on models with navigation disconnected. serial number with you, ask your
system) to enter the five-digit code. dealer how to retrieve it.
Features
The code is on the Anti-theft U.S. owners
Identification Card included in your We recommend that you register the On models with navigation system
owner’s manual kit. When it is security code at Owner Link (owners. You need to enter a separate code
entered correctly, the radio will start honda.com.) If you lose the Anti- for the navigation system to
playing. theft Identification Card before reactivate. The Anti-theft Card also
registering the code at Owner Link, lists the navigation system’s security
The Anti-theft Identification Card you must obtain the code from your code and serial number. Follow the
also lists your audio serial number. It dealer or https://radio-navicode.honda. same procedure to retrieve the serial
is best to store the card in a safe com/. To do this, you will need the number and obtain the code, and
place at home. In addition, you audio system’s serial number. If you read the navigation system manual
should write the audio system’s do not have the serial number with for details.
serial number in this owner’s manual. you, ask your dealer or go to https://
radio-navicode.honda.com/ for
If you make a mistake entering the information on how to retrieve it.
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
221
Setting the Clock (Models without navigation system)
To set the time, press the CLOCK Insight model EX model without navigation system
button until you hear a beep. The and LX model
displayed time begins to blink. CLOCK BUTTON
(A.SEL side of the A.SEL/SCAN bar) HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 1)
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to

enter the set time. HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 4) (PRESET 6)
You can quickly set the time to the MINUTE BUTTON CLOCK BUTTON RESET BUTTON
nearest hour. If the displayed time is (PRESET 5) (FM/AM button) (PRESET 3)
before the half hour, press and hold MINUTE BUTTON
the CLOCK button, then press the R (PRESET 2)
(reset) button to set the time back to
the previous hour. If the displayed For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
time is after the half hour, the same 1:52 will reset to 2:00
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour. When you set the time, the ignition
switch must be ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
222
Security System
On LX and EX models The security system does not set if

The security system helps to protect the hood, hatch, or any door is not
your vehicle and valuables from theft. fully closed. If the system will not set,
The horn sounds and a combination check the door and hatch open
of headlights, parking lights, side indicator on the instrument panel
marker lights and taillights flashes if and multi-information display (see
someone attempts to break into your page 12 ) to see if the doors and
vehicle or remove the audio unit. hatch are fully closed. Since it is not
Features
This alarm continues for two part of the monitor display, manually
minutes, then the system resets. To check the hood.
deactivate the system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock the SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR NOTE: To see if the system is set
driver’s door with the key or the after you exit the vehicle, press the
remote transmitter. Once the security system is sets, LOCK button on the remote
The security system sets opening any door, the hatch, or the transmitter within five seconds. If
automatically 15 seconds after you hood without using the key or the the system is set, the horn will beep
lock the doors, hood, and the hatch. remote transmitter, will cause the once.
For the system to activate, you must alarm to activate. It also activates if
lock the doors and the hatch from the audio unit is removed from the Do not attempt to alter this system
the outside with the key, or use dashboard or the wiring is cut. or add other devices to it.
driver’s lock tab, door lock master
switch, or remote transmitter. The The alarm also activates if a
security system indicator on the passenger inside the locked vehicle
instrument panel starts blinking turns the ignition switch on.
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
223
Cruise Control
On LX and EX models Using the Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
Cruise control allows you to maintain DECEL button on the steering
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTON
without keeping your foot on the indicator on the instrument panel
accelerator pedal. It should be used CANCEL comes on to show the system is
for cruising on straight, open BUTTON now activated.
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery Cruise control may not hold the set
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
SET/DECEL
BUTTON brakes to slow down. This will cancel
Improper use of the cruise the cruise control. To resume the set
control can lead to a crash. speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
1. Push the CRUISE button on the The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
Use the cruise control only steering wheel. The CRUISE on the instrument panel will come
when traveling on open MAIN indicator on the instrument back on.
highways in good weather. panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
224
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
Press and hold the SET/DECEL completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. will return to the set cruising speed.
desired cruising speed, release the
button. To slow down in very small Resting your foot on the brake pedal
Features
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL causes cruise control to cancel.
To increase your speed in very button. Each time you do this,
small amounts, tap the RES/ your vehicle will slow down about
ACCEL button. Each time you do 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
Push on the accelerator pedal. CONTROL indicator on the
Accelerate to the desired cruising instrument panel will go out.
speed, then press the SET/ When the vehicle slows to the
DECEL button. desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
225
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control EX models only Resuming the Set Speed

Tapping either of the paddle shifters When you push the CANCEL button,
CRUISE BUTTON
RES/ACCEL shifts the speed up or down, but does or tap the brake pedal, the system
BUTTON not cancel the cruise control. For will remember the previously-set
CANCEL more information on driving with cruising speed. To return to that
BUTTON paddle shifters, see page 278 . speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
SET/DECEL
BUTTON Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
You can cancel cruise control in any previous cruising speed.
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel.
226
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth- Using HFL
allows you to place and receive compatible cell phone. For a list of HFL Buttons
phone calls using voice commands, compatible phones, pairing
without handling your cell phone. procedures, and special feature HFL TALK
capabilities: BUTTON
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.

com or call (888) 528-7876.
Features
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
HFL BACK BUTTON
HFL Talk button − Press and

release to give a command or answer
a call.
HFL Back button − Press and

release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
CONTINUED
227
Voice Control Tips Press and release the HFL Talk Many commands can be spoken
button each time you want to together. For example, you can
make a command. After the beep, say ‘‘Call 123-456-＃＃＃＃’’ or
speak in a clear, natural tone. ‘‘Dial Peter.’’
Try to reduce all background To change the volume level of

noise. If the microphone picks up HFL, use the audio system volume
voices other than yours, knob or the steering wheel volume
commands may be misinterpreted. controls.
MICROPHONE
Air or wind noise from the

dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
228
Help Features Information Display Some phones may send battery,

To hear general HFL information, As an incoming call notification, you signal strength, and roaming status
including help on pairing a phone will see the following display: information to HFL.
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’ SIGNAL STRENGTH BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS
For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
Features
‘‘Hands free help.’’
HFL
MODE
ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING
The Bluetooth icon will also

appear on the display when a phone
is linked.
CONTINUED
229
How to Use HFL

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
‘‘Pair’’ Pair a phone to the system (See page 233)
‘‘Edit’’ Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 234)
‘‘Phone Setup’’ ‘‘Delete’’ Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 234)
‘‘List’’ Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 234)
Press HFL Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
‘‘Status’’ (See page 235)
Talk button
‘‘Next Phone’’ Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 235)
‘‘Set Pairing Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number

Code’’ (See page 235)
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’ ‘‘123-555-＃＃＃＃’’ Enter desired phone number (See page 236)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
‘‘Jim Smith’’ (See page 236)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
230
‘‘Redial’’ Redial the last number called (See page 237)
‘‘Transfer’’ Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 238)
Features
‘‘Mute’’ Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 238)
‘‘Send’’ Send numbers or names during a call (See page 238)
Press HFL
Talk button ‘‘Store’’ Store a phonebook entry (See page 239)
‘‘Edit’’ Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 239)
‘‘Phonebook’’ ‘‘Delete’’ Delete a phonebook entry (See page 240)
‘‘Receive If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
Contact’’ your phone to HFL (See page 240)
‘‘List’’ Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 240)
CONTINUED
231
‘‘Security’’ Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 241)
‘‘Change Passcode’’ Change your security passcode (See page 242)

‘‘System Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
Set up’’ ‘‘Call Notification’’
(See page 242)
‘‘Auto Transfer’’ Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 242)
Press HFL
Talk button ‘‘Clear’’ Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 243)
‘‘Change Language’’ Change language from English to French (See page 244)＊
‘‘Tutorial’’ Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 229)
‘‘Hands Free Help’’ Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 229)
＊ : Canadian models
232
To use HFL, you need to pair your Phone Setup To pair a cell phone:
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to This command group is available for 1. Press and release the HFL Talk
the system. paired cell phones. button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
Phone pairing tips you information about the pairing
You cannot pair your phone while process. If it is not the first phone
the vehicle is moving. you are pairing, say ‘‘Phone
setup’’ and say ‘‘Pair.’’
Features
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to 2. Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone’s manual. your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
Up to six phones can be paired. pairing code and begin searching
for your phone.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL. 3. When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
If after three minutes your phone the options and enter the 4-digit
is not ready to pair or a phone is code from the previous step.
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle. 4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
CONTINUED
233
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone: To hear the names of all paired
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk phones:
button before a command. button before a command. Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
3. If there is more than one phone 3. HFL will ask you which phone you
paired to the system, HFL will ask want to delete. Follow the HFL 3. HFL will read out all the paired
you which phone’s name you want prompts to continue with the phone’s names.
to change. Follow the HFL deletion.
prompts and rename the phone.
234
To hear which paired phone is To change from the currently linked To change the pairing code setting:
currently linked: phone to another paired phone: Press and release the HFL Talk
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
button before a command. button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Set pairing code’’ after the
2. Say ‘‘Status’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘Next phone’’ after the prompts.
Features
prompts.
3. HFL will tell you which phone is 3. If you want HFL to create a
linked to the system. 3. HFL disconnects the linked phone random code each time you pair a
and searches for another paired phone, say ‘‘Random.’’ If you want
phone. to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘Fixed’’
4. Once another phone is found, it is and follow the HFL prompts.
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or

paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
235
Making a Call To make a call using a name in the To make a call using a phone
You can make calls using a name in HFL phonebook: number:
the HFL phonebook or any phone Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk
number. You can also redial the last button before a command. button before a command.
number called.
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between 2. Follow the HFL prompts and say 2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 the name stored in the HFL the phone number you want to dial.
meters). phonebook that you want to call.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
During a call, HFL allows you to talk 3. Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number and say
up to 30 minutes after you remove confirm the name and make the ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
the key from the ignition switch. call.
However, this may weaken the Once connected, you will hear the
vehicle’s battery. person you called through the audio
speakers.
236
To redial the last number called by Receiving a Call Call Waiting

HFL: When you receive a call, an incoming If your phone has Call Waiting, press
Press and release the HFL Talk call notification (if activated) will and release the HFL Talk button to
button and say ‘‘Redial.’’ play and interrupt the audio system put the original call on hold and
if it is on. answer the incoming call.
Press the HFL Talk button to answer To return to the original call, press
the call, or the HFL Back button to the HFL Talk button again. If you
Features
hang up. don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.
237
Transferring a Call Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names During

You can transfer a call from HFL to You can mute your voice to the a Call
your phone, or from your phone to person you are talking to during a HFL allows you to send numbers or
HFL. call. names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
Press and release the HFL Talk To mute your voice during a call, system.
button and say ‘‘Transfer.’’ press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Mute.’’ To send a name or number during a
call:
To unmute your voice, press and Press and release the HFL Talk
release the HFL Talk button and say button before a command.
‘‘Mute’’ again.
1. Say ‘‘Send.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say

the name or number you want to
send.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to send

the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a pound (＃), say

‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
238
Phonebook NOTE: To edit the number stored in a name:

You can store up to 50 names with Avoid using duplicate name Press and release the HFL Talk
their associated numbers in HFL. entries. button before a command.
The numbers you store can be not
only phone numbers but other types, Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name 1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
such as account numbers or entry.
passwords, which can be sent during 2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
a menu-driven call. It is easier for HFL to recognize a
Features
multisyllabic or longer name. For 3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
To store a phonebook entry: example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of the name entry you want to edit.
Press and release the HFL Talk ‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
button before a command. ‘‘John.’’ 4. When asked, say the new number
for that name.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
2. Say ‘‘Store’’ after the prompts. complete the edit.
3. Say a name you want to list as your

phonebook entry.
4. Say the number you want to store

for the name entry.

‘‘Enter’’ to store the entry.
CONTINUED
239
To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk from your cell phone directly to the
button before a command. button before a command. HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’ Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
3. Say the name you want to delete 3. HFL begins reading the names in
and follow the HFL prompts to the order they were stored. 2. Say ‘‘Receive contact ’’ after the
complete the deletion. prompts.
4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFL Talk 3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a
button and say ‘‘Call.’’ number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and

name the number, or say
‘‘Discard’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
5. Follow the HFL prompts if you

want to store another number.
240
System Setup To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the NOTE: Once a passcode is set, you
This command group allows you to HFL system for security purposes: will need to enter it to use HFL each
change or customize HFL basic Press and release the HFL Talk time you start the vehicle. If you
settings. button before a command. forget the code, your dealer will have
to reset it for you, or you will have to
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ clear the entire system (see page
243 ).
2. Say ‘‘Security’’ after the prompts.
Features
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.

confirm the number.
CONTINUED
241
To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or a To activate or deactivate the auto
Press and release the HFL Talk prompt as the incoming call transfer function:
button before a command. notification＊: If you get into the vehicle while you
Press and release the HFL Talk are on the phone, the call can be
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ button before a command. automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
2. Say ‘‘Change passcode’’ after the 1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Call notification’’ after the Press and release the HFL Talk
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say prompts. button before a command.
the new 4-digit passcode.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say 1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
4. Follow the HFL prompts to ‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt .’’ You
confirm the number. can also say ‘‘Off ’’ for no audible 2. Say ‘‘Auto transfer’’ after the
incoming call notification. prompts.
＊ : The default setting is a ring tone. 3. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
242
To clear the system: Quick Language Selection

This operation clears the passcodes, Canadian models only
paired phones, all names in the HFL To quickly change the language:
phonebook, and all imported Press and release the HFL Talk
phonebook data. button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk 1. Say the language you want to
button before a command. change to in that language.
Features
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ 2. Follow the HFL prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Clear’’ after the prompts.

continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
You can also clear the system when

you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘System
clear.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.
243
Change Language Bluetooth Wireless Technology As required by the FCC:

Canadian models only The Bluetooth word mark and logos This device complies with Part 15 of the
To change the system language are registered trademarks owned by FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
between English and French: Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of following two conditions: (1) This device
Press and release the HFL Talk such marks by Honda Motor Co., may not cause harmful interference, and
button before a command. Ltd. is under license. Other (2) this device must accept any
trademarks and trade names are interference received, including
1. Say ‘‘Change language.’’ those of their respective owners. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
change the language to English or Changes or modifications not expressly
French. approved by the party responsible for
If you have not named your paired authority to operate the equipment.
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it This device complies with Industry
in the current language. Canada Standard RSS-210.
When French is your currently conditions: (1) this device may not cause
selected language, you can give voice interference, and (2) this device must
commands in French. accept any interference that may cause
244
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 246

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 246
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 247
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 247
need to know how to properly store Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 249
luggage or packages. The Opening and Closing the
information in this section will help Hood ........................................ 250
you. If you plan to add any Oil Check .................................... 251
accessories to your vehicle, please Engine Coolant Check .............. 252
read the information in this section Fuel Economy ................................ 253
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 256
Carrying Cargo .............................. 258
245
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Use of gasoline with these additives

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate may adversely affect performance,
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump and cause the malfunction indicator
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use lamp on your instrument panel to
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause come on. If this happens, contact
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping your dealer for service. Some
noise that can lead to engine damage. gasoline today is blended with
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid oxygenates such as ethanol. Your
acceleration. vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to
Do not change the oil until the To help prevent harmf ul f uel system 10% ethanol by volume. Do not use
scheduled maintenance time. and engine deposits, use high quality gasoline containing methanol. If you
f uel containing detergent and additives. notice any undesirable operating
Avoid hard braking for the first In addition, in order to maintain good symptoms, try another service
200 miles (300 km). perf ormance, f uel economy, and station or switch to another brand of
emissions control, we strongly gasoline.
You should also follow these recommend the use of gasoline that
recommendations with an does NOT contain harmf ul manganese-
overhauled or exchanged engine, or based f uel additives such as MMT, if
when the brakes are replaced. such gasoline is available.
246
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
Because the level of detergency and For further important fuel-related Refueling
additives in gasoline vary in the information for your vehicle, or
market, Honda endorses the use of information on gasoline that does not FUEL FILL DOOR
‘‘TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline’’ contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
where available to help maintain the owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
performance and reliability of your www.honda.ca for additional
vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent information on gasoline. For more
Gasoline meets a new gasoline information on top tier gasoline, visit
standard jointly established by www.toptiergas.com.
leading automotive manufacturers to
Before Driving
meet the needs of today’s advanced Push
engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers
will, in most cases, identify their
gasoline as having met ‘‘TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline’’ standards at the 1. Park with the driver’s side closest
retail location. This fuel is to the service station pump.
guaranteed to contain the proper
level of detergent additives and be 2. Outside of the vehicle, push on the
free of metallic additives. The proper right side edge of the fuel fill door
level of detergent additives, and in the middle until you hear a click.
absence of harmful metallic additives The fuel fill door will pop up
in gasoline, help avoid build-up of slightly. Pull it outward to open it.
deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
CONTINUED
247
Service Station Procedures
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel

nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
Gasoline is highly flammable HOLDER FUEL FILL CAP not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
and explosive. You can be leaves some room in the fuel tank
burned or seriously injured for the fuel to expand with
when handling fuel. temperature changes.
Stop the engine, and keep If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
heat, sparks, and flame away. even though the tank is not full,
Handle fuel only outdoors. there may be a problem with your
Wipe up spills immediately. vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
TETHER fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. pump. If this does not fix the
You may hear a hissing sound as problem, consult your dealer.
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
248
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Tighten Fuel Cap Message Turn the engine off, and confirm the
until it clicks at least once. If you fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
do not properly tighten the cap, it, then retighten it until it clicks at
you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL least once. The message should go
CAP’’ message on the multi- off after several days of normal
information display. If the system driving once you tighten or replace
still detects an evaporative system the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
leak after retightening the cap, the message, press the INFO button.
malfunction indicator lamp may
come on (see page 367 ). The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
Before Driving
message will appear each time you
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until restart the engine until the system
it latches. turns the message off.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic

system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.
CONTINUED
249
If the system still detects a leak in Opening and Closing the Hood
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off, Pull
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 367 .
1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front
parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood near the center.
release handle located under the Slide your hand to the left until
lower left corner of the dashboard. you feel the hood latch handle.
The hood will pop up slightly. Push this handle to the left to
release the hood. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves

stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
250
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to Oil Check

remove the support rod from the
GRIP hole. Put the support rod back into DIPSTICK
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
Before Driving
SUPPORT ROD CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support Wait a few minutes after turning the
rod out of its clip. Insert the end engine off before you check the oil.
into the designated hole in the
hood. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean

cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back

into its hole.
CONTINUED
251
Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

Checks on page 309 for information
MAX RESERVE TANK about checking other items on your
vehicle.
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MIN
4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the
check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 317 for
If it is near or below the lower mark, information on adding the proper
see Adding Engine Oil on page 312 . coolant.
252
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number. City MPG Highway MPG
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments. Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Economy Fuel Cost
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA achieved is also provided. per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
estimates include: data) divided by the combined fuel
Combined Fuel Economy − economy.
City MPG − Represents urban Represents a combination of city and
driving in light traffic. A range of highway driving. The scale For more information on fuel
miles per gallon achieved is also represents the range of combined economy ratings and factors that
provided. fuel economy for other vehicles in affect fuel economy, visit www.
the class. fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
Highway MPG − Represents a vehicles.gc.ca)
mixture of rural and interstate Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, Provides an estimated annual fuel
typical of longer trips in free-flowing cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
traffic. A range of miles per gallon km) per year multiplied by the cost
253
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity Drive Efficiently

The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Drive moderately − Rapid
vehicle’s fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page acceleration, abrupt cornering,
Aggressive driving (hard 313). and hard braking increase fuel
acceleration and braking) consumption.
Excessive idling, accelerating and Maintain proper tire inflation
braking in stop-and-go traffic − An underinflated tire increases Observe the speed limit −
Cold engine operation (engines ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
are more efficient when warmed fuel economy. on fuel economy at speeds above
up) 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
Driving with a heavy load or the Avoid carrying excess weight in speed and you reduce the drag.
air conditioner running your vehicle − It puts a heavier Trailers, car top carriers, roof
Improperly inflated tires load on the engine, increasing fuel racks and bike racks are also big
consumption. contributors to increased drag.
Improving Fuel Economy
Keep your vehicle clean − In Avoid excessive idling − Idling
Vehicle Maintenance particular, a build-up of snow or results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
A properly maintained vehicle mud on your vehicle’s underside per liter).
maximizes fuel economy. Poor adds weight and rolling resistance.
maintenance can significantly reduce Frequent cleaning helps your fuel Use the ECON mode as much as
fuel economy. Always maintain your economy. possible.
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multi-
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 309 ).
For example:
254
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air Checking Your Fuel Economy

conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible. Miles Gallons Miles per
driven of fuel Gallon
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
Before Driving
L per
fuel efficient than a cold one. 100 Liter Kilometers 100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
about your actual fuel economy. 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
255
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

non-Honda accessories, may make
your vehicle unsafe. Before you Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
make any modifications or add any modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 369 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding the proper operation of your
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. vehicle.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any electronic
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular accessory, have the installer
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and contact your dealer for assistance.
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should If possible, have your dealer
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s inspect the final installation.
handling, stability, and reliability. computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and Do not install accessories on the
tire pressure monitoring system (if side pillars or across the rear
equipped). windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
256
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Non-Honda wheels, because they

Removing parts from your vehicle, are a universal design, can cause
or replacing components with excessive stress on suspension
non-Honda components could components and will not be
seriously affect your vehicle’s compatible with the tire pressure
handling, stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS)＊.
Some examples are: Larger or smaller wheels and tires

can interfere with the operation of
Lowering your vehicle with a your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Before Driving
non-Honda suspension kit that other systems.
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the Modifying your steering wheel or
undercarriage to hit speed bumps any other part of your vehicle’s
or other raised objects, which safety features can make the
could cause the airbags to deploy. systems ineffective.
Raising your vehicle with a If you plan to modify your vehicle,

non-Honda suspension kit can consult your dealer.
affect the handling, stability, and
reliability. ＊ : U.S. models
257
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

storage areas:
Glove box
FLOOR STORAGE DOOR POCKETS CENTER POCKET Door pockets
COMPARTMENT Seat-back pockets＊
GLOVE BOX Under floor storages
Floor storage compartment
Center tray
Console compartment＊
Center pocket(s)＊
Cargo area
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
CARGO AREA type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
UNDER FLOOR SEAT-BACK CENTER TRAY＊/
STORAGES POCKETS＊ CENTER POCKET＊＊ : If equipped
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT＊
EX with navigation system model is shown.

＊ : If equipped
258
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (4)The resulting figure equals the

The maximum load for your vehicle available amount of cargo and
is 850 lbs (385 kg). Overloading or improper luggage load capacity. For
loading can affect handling and example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
See Tire And Loading Information stability and cause a crash in equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
label attached to the driver’s which you can be hurt or killed. five 150 lb. passengers in your
doorjamb. vehicle, the amount of available
Follow all load limits and other cargo and luggage load capacity is
Label Example loading guidelines in this 650 lbs.
manual. (1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
Before Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load (5)Determine the combined weight
Limit − of luggage and cargo being loaded
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The on the vehicle. That weight may
combined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
cargo should never exceed XXX cargo and luggage load capacity
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s calculated in Step 4.
This figure includes the total weight placard.
of all occupants, cargo, and (6)If your vehicle will be towing a
accessories, and the tongue load if (2)Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
you are towing a trailer. of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle.
will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
(3)Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
the driver and passengers from your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs. CONTINUED
259
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Example 1
Max Load 850 lbs Passenger Weight Cargo Weight Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
(385 kg) 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs 550 lbs Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) (249 kg) are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Example 2
Max Load 850 lbs Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(385 kg) 150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs 250 lbs
(68 kg x 4 = 272 kg) (113 kg)
Example 3
Max Load 850 lbs Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(385 kg) 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs 100 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) (45 kg)
260
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area If you carry large items that
Compartment Distribute cargo evenly on the prevent you from closing the
Store or secure all items that could floor of the hatch, placing the hatch, exhaust gas can enter the
be thrown around and hurt heaviest items on the bottom and passenger area. To avoid the
someone during a crash. as far forward as possible. possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
Be sure items placed on the floor Try to secure the items with rope on page 56 .
behind the front seats cannot roll or cord so they will not shift while
under the seats and interfere with you are driving. If you fold the rear seats down, tie
the driver’s ability to operate the down items that could be thrown
Before Driving
pedals, the operation of the seats, Do not place items on the cargo about the vehicle during a crash or
or the operation of the sensors area cover (if equipped), or stack sudden stop. Keep all cargo below
under the seats. objects higher than the top of the the bottom of the windows. If it is
back seat. They could block your higher, it could interfere with
Keep the glove box closed while view and be thrown about the proper operation of the side
driving. If it is open, a passenger vehicle during a crash or sudden curtain airbags.
could injure their knees during a stop.
crash or sudden stop. Refer to page 145 for folding rear
Do not spill any liquids on or seats.
around the IMA battery. Spilled
liquids may damage the IMA
battery. If you accidentally spill
liquids on or around the battery,
ensure that the spill is completely
wiped up at the earliest possible
time.
261
Carrying Cargo
Air Intake Do not spill any liquids over the air

intake or insert any foreign objects
in it. This may damage the IMA
battery and the power control unit.
AIR INTAKE
The air intake for the IMA battery

and electronics is located on the rear
left pillar. Do not block this air intake.
Doing so may cause the IMA battery
and the power control unit to
overheat, causing the IMA to shut
down. It will start working again
after it cools.
262
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 264

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 265
conditions, and how to operate the Eco Assist System ......................... 266
automatic transmissions (CVT). It Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 273
also includes important information Driving with the Paddle
on parking your vehicle, the braking Shifters ........................................ 278
system, the vehicle stability assist Auto Idle Stop................................. 283
(VSA ) system, and the tire pressure Parking ............................................ 286
monitoring system (TPMS). Braking System.............................. 287
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 289
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 291
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ..... 295
Hill Start Assist System ............ 297
Towing a Trailer ............................ 298
263
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 4. Check that any items you may be 9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
and adjustments before you drive carrying are stored properly or your passengers have fastened
your vehicle. fastened down securely. their seat belts (see page 17 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, 5. Check the seat adjustment (see 10.When you start the engine, check
and outside lights are clean and page 141 ). the gauges and indicators in the
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, instrument panel, and the
or ice. 6. Check the adjustment of the messages on the multi-information
inside and outside mirrors (see display (see pages 61 , 72 and
2. Check that the hood and hatch are page 147 ). 89 ).
fully closed.
7. Check the steering wheel
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire adjustment (see page 128 ).
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 340 ). 8. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
264
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. Starting in Cold Weather

In cold weather, the conventional
2. In cold weather, turn off all The immobilizer system protects your starter is used instead of the IMA
electrical accessories to reduce vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly system starter. This is normal.
the drain on the battery. coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
3. Make sure the shift lever is in more inf ormation, see page 130 .
Park. Press on the brake pedal. The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
4. Without touching the accelerator altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
pedal, turn the ignition key to the meters) adds to this problem.
START (III) position. Do not hold
Driving
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
265
Eco Assist System
ECON MODE INDICATOR

Ambient Meter
ECON BUTTON
ECO-drive Result
ECO-guide feedback
Eco Assist System is a driver The system monitors your driving Your vehicle’s fuel economy may
feedback system designed to help style, and can display how it impacts improve more with the ECON mode
you develop and maintain a fuel your vehicle’s fuel economy. You can on (see page 127 ).
efficient driving style. then make adjustments to your
driving style to maximize fuel The driver feedback information is
economy. (For additional shown in two locations:
information on fuel economy, see The ambient meter, located
page 253 .) behind the speedometer (see page
72 ).
The multi-information display (see

page 75 ).
266
Eco Assist System
Eco Guide Feedback During acceleration, the bar Eco Drive Bar Examples
extends to the right of the center Driving Style Eco Drive Bar
Center Position line. Slow, steady
Deceleration Acceleration acceleration -
Monitor Monitor
During deceleration, the bar maximizes fuel
extends to the left of the center economy
ECO line. Slow deceleration -
DRIVE maximizes fuel
BAR If the bar stays within the Efficient economy
Efficient Zones Driving Zones, your current Moderate
Inefficient Braking Zone driving style is conducive to good acceleration

fuel economy.
Driving
Inefficient Driving Zone
Moderate
ECO ELEMENTS
If the bar extends into the deceleration
The Eco Drive Bar on the Eco guide Inefficient Driving Zones, your
feedback display appears on the current driving style is not Aggressive/
multi-information display while you conducive to good fuel economy. Inconsistent
drive. acceleration - lowers
It is recommended to drive in the D fuel economy
position for better fuel efficiency. Aggressive
deceleration - lowers
fuel economy
CONTINUED
267
Eco Assist System
Ambient Meter
Meter Background Color Fuel Economy
AMBIENT METER
(Background Color)
Green High
Blue Green
The Ambient Meter (the light

behind the speedometer) changes
color to show the effects of your
driving style. This feature can be Blue
turned off (see page 103 ).
Low
268
Eco Assist System
Eco Assist Scoring Real Time Score

A point system is used so you can
monitor your driving style and the
impact on fuel economy. Points are:
Accumulated when your driving FIRST STAGE SECOND STAGE THIRD STAGE
style is fuel efficient
Deducted when your style is not
fuel efficient
Driving
PLANT ICON
With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position
Eco Assist scoring is displayed on Real Time Score − Your current

the multi-information display in the trip is represented on the Eco Guide
following ways: screen, starting without any leaves
on the plants. Leaves then
accumulate during the current trip,
as long as you maintain an economic
driving style.
CONTINUED
269
Eco Assist System
Drive Cycle Score − The score Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points

from your just completed trip is
represented on the Eco Score screen STAGE-UP TROPHY
RECOGNITION
by the ‘‘plant’’ icons. ICON
Lifetime Points − Cumulative, or

lifetime trips, which build up over
time, represented by a bar graph at
the bottom of the Eco Score display.
Each time you turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK (0) position, the DRIVE CYCLE
Eco Score displays for a few seconds SCORE
to show your current stage and
lifetime points. LIFETIME
POINTS
STAGE-DOWN RECOGNITION ICON
When turning off the ignition switch
270
Eco Assist System
There are three Eco stages, with five Real time scores must accumulate over time to result in a stage change. In order to build lifetime
plants per stage. As you accumulate points and advance to the next stage, you need to keep your efficient driving style every time you
a specified number of leaves, you make a trip. It can take several months to move from one stage to the next. Individual results will
advance from one stage to the next. vary.
The plant grows leaves from left to Stages/Displays and Icons Definition
right, or loses them from right to left. First Stage A total of two leaves can be put on each plant icon.
A trophy icon appears once you have
reached the maximum third stage
score.
Second Stage A total of four leaves can be added to each plant icon.
The scoring system for points is
based on:
Driving
Braking and accelerating
Vehicle speed Third Stage A circular shaped icon, which represents a blossom, can be
ECON button usage added on top of each plant icon with four leaves.
Idle duration
An icon appears once you have reached the maximum score for
Maximum Score Icons each stage and are moving up to the next stage. These icons
First Second Third appear briefly when the ignition switch is turned off.
Stage Stage Stage Once the 3rd stage maximum score is reached, the system
continues to monitor your driving. If you maintain a fuel
efficient driving style, your score remains at the highest stage.
If you drive less efficiently, points will be deducted and you
may drop (stage down) to the previous stage.
CONTINUED
271
Eco Assist System
As you progress to a higher level, the Reset the System Complete the following steps within
system monitors your driving style The following procedure clears all 30 seconds:
more strictly. As a result, you must leaves and your lifetime points. This 1. Press and release the brake pedal
further refine your driving style to procedure must be followed exactly. at least two times. The ambient
continue to move up to the next level. meter color changes from blue to
Turn the ignition switch to the ON green＊.
The following are some of the (II) position. Confirm that the ECON
conditions that may affect your mode is OFF. If it is OFF, proceed to ＊: The ambient meter color
score: step 1. Do not run the engine. changes only if the multi-
information display’s meter
Extremely high or low ambient If the ECON mode is on, press and color change setting is on. (See
temperature release the ECON button to turn it page 103 .)
Inconsistent acceleration use, such off. You also need to turn the ignition
as pumping the pedal repeatedly switch off. 2. Press and release the ECON
within a short period of time button two times (ECON mode
Frequent use of the climate Turn the ignition switch to the ON comes on, then goes off). The
control system (II) position again. Do not run the ambient meter color goes off, and
Short distance trips engine. the accumulated data is cleared.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK (0) position.
272
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Continuously Variable Shift Lever Position Indicators

Transmission (CVT)
Honda’s Continuously Variable
Transmission’s unique design
provides a smooth, constant flow of
power. It is electronically controlled
for more precise operation and
better fuel economy.
Driving
Insight and LX models EX models
These indicators on the instrument If the malfunction indicator lamp

panel show which position the shift comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
lever is in. indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
few seconds when you turn the have the transmission checked by
ignition switch to the ON (II) your dealer as soon as possible.
position. If it flashes while driving (in When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
any shift position), it indicates a possible problem with the
possible problem in the transmission. transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display.
273
Shifting Insight and LX models EX models

To shift from: Do this: To shift from: Do this:
P to R Press the brake pedal and Press the brake pedal and
press the release button. P to R press the release button.
R to P
N to R Press the release button. R to P
D to S N to R Press the release button.
S to L D to S
L to S S to D
S to D D to N Move the lever.
D to N Move the lever. N to D
N to D R to N
R to N
To shift from Park to any position,

press the brake pedal, the release
button on the front of the shift lever,
then pull the lever. You cannot shift
out of Park when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
274
Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − Press the brake Drive (D) − Use this position for
cally locks the transmission. Use pedal and the release button on the your normal driving. The
Park whenever you are turning off or front of the shift lever to shift from transmission automatically adjusts to
starting the engine. To shift out of Park to reverse. To shift from keep the engine at the best speed for
Park, you must press on the brake reverse to neutral, come to a driving conditions. To help the
pedal and have your foot off the complete stop, and then shift. Press engine warm up faster, the
accelerator pedal. Press the release the release button before shifting transmission will select ratios that
button on the front of the shift lever into reverse from neutral. allow the engine to run at higher
to move it. speeds when it is cold.
Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you
If you have done all of the above and need to restart a stalled engine or if Insight and LX models
still cannot move the lever out of it is necessary to stop briefly with Second (S) − To shift into the S
Driving
Park, see Shift Lock Release on the engine idling. Always shift to the position, press the release button on
page 277 . Park position if you need to leave the the front of the shift lever, and move
vehicle for any reason. Press on the the lever to S. Selecting Second
You must also press the release brake pedal when you are moving shifts the transmission into a lower
button to shift into Park. To avoid the shift lever from Neutral to range of ratios for better
transmission damage, come to a another position. acceleration and increased engine
complete stop before shifting into braking. Use Second when you are
Park. The shift lever must be in Park going down a steep hill.
before you can remove the key from
CONTINUED
275
Insight and LX models EX models Speed Limiter

Low (L) − To shift to Low, press Second (S) − To shift into the S When the vehicle reaches the
the release button on the front of the position, press the release button on maximum speed in any shift position,
shift lever. Use Low to make better the front of the shift lever, and move you may feel the engine cut in and
use of engine power when climbing, the lever to S. The S position is out. This is caused by a limiter (112
and for maximum engine braking similar to D, except the range of mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’s
when going down steep hills. ratios are different for better computer controls. The engine will
acceleration and increased engine run normally when you reduce the
For faster acceleration when in D, S, braking. speed to below the maximum.
or L, the transmission will
automatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lower With the shift lever in D or S, you
range of ratios by pushing the can also use the paddle shifters to
accelerator pedal to the floor. shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal. For more information
on driving with the paddle shifters,
see page 278 .
276
Shift Lock Release RELEASE BUTTON

This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover to 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
prevent scratches. Using a small release slot. lock release slot, then reinstall the
flat-tip screwdriver or a metal cover. Make sure the notch on the
fingernail file, carefully pry on the 5. Push down on the key while you cover is on the left side. Insert the
notch of the cover to remove it. press the release button on the key into the ignition switch, press
shift lever and move the shift lever the brake pedal, and restart the
out of Park to neutral. engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
277
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in the

D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
On EX models
When you are driving in the D
position, pulling either paddle shifter
switches from the D-normal shift
mode to the D-paddle shift mode.
You can shift the transmission up or
down through seven-stages manually
with the paddle shifters.
Downshifting gives you more power SHIFT INDICATOR

when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill. To shift up or down, use the ＋ When you pull either paddle shifter,
(right) or − (left) paddle shifter on the shift indicator shows you the
either side of the steering wheel. selected speed number.
Pull the ＋ (right) paddle shifter to When the transmission returns to

upshift. Pull − (left) to downshift. ordinary automatic transmission
(CVT), the displayed shift indicator
disappears.
278
Downshifting with the − (left) The transmission control system To cancel the D-paddle shift mode
paddle shifter allows you to increase monitors the accelerator pedal use manually, pull and hold the ＋ side
the engine braking when going down and your driving conditions. When paddle shifter until the shift indicator
steep or long hills, and provides you press the accelerator pedal as in goes out.
more power when climbing uphills. the normal driving, the system
You can upshift the transmission judges that you are driving at a The transmission remains in the
manually to reduce the rpm. constant cruising speed without selected speed if you do not
using the paddle shifters. Under accelerate.
these conditions, D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission automatically returns to
ordinary automatic transmission
Driving
(CVT).
CONTINUED
279
Each time you pull either paddle The automatic transmission (CVT) The transmission downshifts to first
shifter, the transmission shifts one will not allow you to shift if: speed and returns to ordinary
speed up or down. If you want to automatic transmission (CVT) when
shift up or down more than two You downshift before the engine the vehicle comes to a complete stop
speeds, pull the paddle shifter twice, speed reaches the highest and the vehicle speed is about 6 mph
pause, and then pull it again. threshold of the lower speed. (10 km/h).
If you try to do this, the shift If there is a problem in the

indicator will flash the number of transmission while you are driving
the lower speed several times, with the paddle shifters, the D
then return to a higher speed. indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
You upshift before the engine transmission returns to ordinary
speed reaches the lowest automatic transmission (CVT).
threshold of the higher speed.
You pull both paddle shifters at

the same time.
You pull one of the two paddle

shifters with another paddle
shifter being pulled.
280
Using the Paddle Shifters in the S ‘‘M’’ INDICATOR If you keep depressing the
position (7-Speed Manual Shift accelerator pedal without pulling the
Mode) paddle shifter, the speed will be
On EX models automatically shifted up just before
With the shift lever in the S position, the tachometer’s red zone.
you can select the 7-Speed Manual
shift mode to shift speeds; much like The transmission also shifts
a manual transmission using the automatically as the vehicle comes to
paddle shifters, but without a clutch a complete stop. It downshifts to first
pedal. speed when the vehicle speed
reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
To enter the 7-speed manual shift SHIFT INDICATOR
Driving
mode, press the release button on Downshifting with the − (left)
the front of the shift lever, move the When you move the shift lever from paddle shifter allows you to increase
lever to the S position, then pull the ‘‘D’’ to the ‘‘S’’ position and pull the engine braking when going down
either paddle shifter. To cancel the either paddle shifter, the shift steep or long hills, and provides
7-speed manual shift mode and indicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with the more power when climbing uphills.
return to the ordinary automatic selected speed number. You can upshift the transmission
transmission (CVT), move the shift manually to reduce the rpm.
lever from the S position. When To upshift, pull the ＋ (right) paddle
moving the shift lever, be careful not shifter. To downshift, pull the −
to operate incorrectly. While you are (left) paddle shifter.
driving in the 7-speed manual shift
mode, the transmission will not
automatically return to the ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT). CONTINUED
281
The automatic transmission (CVT) Recommended Shift Points L (Low) mode − To shift to Low,
will not allow you to shift if: Drive in the highest speed number pull and hold both paddle shifters
that lets the engine run and simultaneously until you see L in the
You downshift before the engine accelerate smoothly. This will give shift indicator. Use Low to get more
speed reaches the highest you effective emissions control. The power when climbing, and for
threshold of the lower speed. following shift points are maximum engine braking when
recommended: going down steep hills.
If you try to do this, the shift
indicator will flash the number of
the lower speed several times, Shift up Normal acceleration
then return to a higher speed.
1→2 15 mph (24 km/h)
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest 2→3 25 mph (40 km/h)
threshold of the higher speed.
3→4 40 mph (64 km/h)
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time. 4→5 45 mph (72 km/h)
You pull one of the two paddle 5→6 50 mph (81 km/h)
shifters with another paddle
shifter being pulled. 6→7 55 mph (89 km/h)
282
Auto Idle Stop
To help maximize fuel economy, While the auto idle stop function is The transmission fluid
your vehicle has an Auto Idle Stop activated, the auto idle stop indicator temperature is low.
function. Depending on in the instrument panel blinks (see
environmental conditions and vehicle page 285 ). The vehicle is stopped with the
operation, the engine will shut off shift position in P, R, S, or L.
when you come to a stop. When the ECON mode is on, the
engine is more likely to stop than When the vehicle is stopped on an
The engine automatically stops when when it is off (see page 127 ). incline.
the vehicle comes to a stop with the
shift lever in the D position and the The engine will not stop The windshield defroster is on.
brake pedal pressed. automatically under the following
The engine may also stop when conditions: The fan speed is selected to high
Driving
vehicle speed drops below 7 mph (11 (more than four steps on the
km/h) with the brake pedal pressed. Vehicle speed does not go above 9 horizontal fan speed indicators).
mph (15 km/h) after starting the
engine. The IMA battery charge is low.
The pointer of the charge/assist

gauge does not move when
accelerating or decelerating.
The engine coolant temperature is

low.
CONTINUED
283
Auto Idle Stop
The engine may not stop The engine automatically restarts The engine coolant temperature
automatically under the following when: becomes low.
conditions:
The brake pedal is released. The pressure on the brake pedal is
The ECON button is off, and there repeatedly applied and released
is a significant difference between Under the following conditions, the slightly during a stop.
the ambient temperature and the engine restarts even if the brake
temperature setting of the climate pedal is pressed: The ECON button is off, and the
control system. difference between the ambient
The shift position is changed to R temperature and the temperature
The climate control system is or L. setting of the climate control
dehumidifying the air. system becomes significant.
The accelerator pedal is pressed
The vehicle is stopped by braking The climate control system starts
suddenly. The pressure to the brake pedal is to dehumidify the interior
reduced and the vehicle starts
When the ECON button is on, the moving while stopped on an incline.
engine is more likely to stop. See
page 127 for the ECON button. The IMA battery charge becomes
low.
The windshield defroster button is

pressed.
284
Auto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop Indicator If the auto idle stop function turns The time that auto idle stop is
off the engine for a long time, the activated may be reduced if you
charge of the IMA and 12 volt operate the windshield wipers with
batteries becomes low, and the the climate control system on.
engine may not restart automatically.
Always turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position, set the
parking brake, and remove the key if
you are getting out of the vehicle.
Driving
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
This indicator blinks when the auto

idle stop system is in operation. If
the driver’s door is opened while the
indicator is blinking, the buzzer
sounds to notify that the auto idle
stop system is active.
285
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing downhill,
you park your vehicle. Make sure turn the front wheels toward the
the parking brake is set firmly, or Make sure the windows are closed. curb.
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline. Turn off the lights. Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Set the parking brake before you put Place any packages, valuables, etc. Driving with the parking brake
the transmission in Park. This keeps in the cargo area or take them partially set can overheat or
the vehicle from moving and putting with you. damage the rear brakes.
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission. Lock the doors and the hatch.
LX and EX models
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn

the front wheels away from the
curb.
286
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front Constant application of the brakes Check the brakes after driving
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear when going down a long hill builds through deep water. Apply the
wheels are drum. A power assist up heat and reduces their brakes moderately to see if they feel
helps reduce the effort needed on effectiveness. Use the engine to normal. If not, apply them gently and
the brake pedal. The ABS helps you assist the brakes by taking your foot frequently until they do. Be extra
retain steering control when braking off the accelerator and downshifting cautious in your driving.
very hard. to a lower speed.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps

the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
Driving
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
287
Braking System
Braking System Design The following features are also Brake Pad Wear Indicators
The hydraulic system that operates equipped: If the brake pads need replacing, you
the brakes has two separate circuits. will hear a distinctive, metallic
Each circuit works diagonally across Creep Aid System screeching sound when you apply
the vehicle (the left-front brake is With the shift lever in D, S or L, this the brake pedal. If you do not have
connected with the right-rear brake, feature applies brake pressure the brake pads replaced, they will
etc.). If one circuit should develop a briefly as you release the brake screech all the time. It is normal for
problem, you will still have braking pedal to prevent the vehicle from the brakes to occasionally squeal or
at two wheels. moving unexpectedly. squeak when you apply them.
Brake-Assist
This feature helps you apply the
brakes with less force during an
emergency braking situation.
288
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You should never pump the brake pedal. ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from Let the ABS work for you by always
locking up, and helps you retain keeping firm, steady pressure on the If this indicator comes on, the anti-
steering control by pumping the brake pedal. This is sometimes lock function of the braking system
brakes rapidly, much faster than a referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’ has shut down. The brakes still work
person can do it. like a conventional system, but
You will feel a pulsation in the brake without anti-lock. You should have
The electronic brake distribution pedal when the ABS activates, and your dealer inspect your vehicle as
(EBD) system, which is part of the you may hear some noise. This is soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear normal: it is the ABS rapidly
braking distribution according to pumping the brakes. On dry When the ABS indicator comes on,
vehicle loading. pavement, you will need to press on you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
Driving
the brake pedal very hard before the SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
ABS activates. However, you may information display.
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice. If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 368 .
CONTINUED
289
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders ABS cannot prevent a loss of
system indicator come on together, stability. Always steer moderately
and the parking brake is fully ABS does not reduce the time or when you are braking hard. Severe
released, the EBD system may also distance it takes to stop the or sharp steering wheel movement
be shut down. vehicle. It only helps with steering can still cause your vehicle to veer
control during braking. into oncoming traffic or off the road.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 368 . If the brakes feel normal, ABS will not prevent a skid that A vehicle with ABS may require a
drive slowly and have your vehicle results from changing direction longer distance to stop on loose or
repaired by your dealer as soon as abruptly, such as trying to take a uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking corner too fast or making a sudden snow, than a vehicle without anti-
which could cause the rear wheels to lane change. Always drive at a safe lock.
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of speed for the road and weather
control. conditions.
290
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only Low Tire Pressure/ If you think you can safely drive a
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire TPMS Indicator short distance to a service station,
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) When the low tire pressure/TPMS proceed slowly to the station, then
that turns on every time you start the indicator is on, one or more of your inflate the tire to the recommended
engine and monitors the pressure in tires is significantly underinflated. pressure.
your tires while driving. You should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them If the tire is flat, or if the tire
Each tire has its own pressure to the proper pressure as indicated pressure is too low to continue
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire on the vehicle’s tire information driving, replace the tire with the
becomes significantly low, the placard. compact spare tire (see page 350 ).
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire If you cannot make the low tire Driving on a significantly under-
Driving
pressure/TPMS indicator in the pressure/TPMS indicator and inflated tire causes the tire to
instrument panel to come on. If this message on the multi-information overheat and can lead to tire failure.
happens, you will see a ‘‘CHECK display go out after inflating the tires Under-inflation also reduces fuel
TIRE PRESSURE’’ message on the to the specified values, have your efficiency and tire tread life, and may
multi-information display. dealer check the system as soon as affect the vehicle’s handling and
possible. stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by

temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
CONTINUED
291
For example, if you check and fill Although your tire pressure is TPMS System Failure
your tires in a warm area, then drive monitored, you must manually check
in extremely cold weather, the tire the tire pressures monthly.
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated Each tire, including the spare, should
and cause the low tire pressure/ be checked monthly when the
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if vehicle is cold, and set to the
you check and adjust your tire recommended inflation pressure as
pressure in cooler conditions, and specified on the vehicle placard and
drive into extremely hot conditions, in the owner’s manual (see page
the tires may become overinflated. 341 ).
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
Refer to page 340 for tire inflation you will see the above message on
guidelines. the multi-information display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, If you see this message, the system
this indicator begins to flash. It stops is off and is not monitoring the tire
flashing after approximately 1 pressures. Have the system checked
minute, then stays on. You will also by your dealer as soon as possible.
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
display (see TPMS System Failure).
292
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS Changing a Tire with TPMS This indicator and the warning
indicator begins to flash, then stays If you have a flat tire, the low tire message on the multi-information
on (see page 291 ). pressure/TPMS indicator will come display will go off, after several miles
on. Replace the flat tire with the (kilometers) driving, when the spare
If the low tire pressure/TPMS compact spare tire (see page 351 ). tire is replaced with the specified
indicator comes on, or the multi- regular tire equipped with the tire
information display shows a After the flat tire is replaced with the pressure monitor sensor.
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message, spare tire, the low tire pressure/
the VSA system automatically turns TPMS indicator stays on while Each wheel (except the compact
on even when the VSA system is driving. After several miles spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF (kilometers) driving, this indicator tire pressure sensor. You must use
switch (see page 296 ). If this begins to flash, then stays on again. TPMS specific wheels. It is
Driving
happens, you cannot turn the VSA You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS recommended that you always have
system off by pressing the VSA OFF SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- your tires serviced by your dealer or
switch again. information display. This is normal; qualified technician.
the system cannot monitor the spare
When you restart the vehicle with tire pressure. Manually check the
the compact spare tire, the TPMS spare tire pressure to be sure it is
system message will also be correct.
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
CONTINUED
293
Never use a puncture-repairing agent As required by the FCC:

in a flat tire. If used, you will have to This device complies with Part 15 of the
replace the tire pressure sensor. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
Have the flat tire repaired by your following two conditions: (1) This device
dealer as soon as possible. may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

This device complies with Industry

conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
294
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA OFF Indicator The VSA system indicator will also
system helps to stabilize the vehicle come on when there is a problem in
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA is off, the VSA OFF the hill start assist system. For more
more or less than desired. It also indicator comes on as a reminder. information, see page 297 .
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or Vehicle Stability Assist NOTE: The main function of the
slippery road surfaces. It does this (VSA) System Indicator VSA system is generally known as
by regulating the engine’s output and When VSA activates, you will see the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
by selectively applying the brakes. VSA system indicator blink. The system also includes a traction
control function.
When VSA activates, you may notice If this indicator comes on while
that the engine does not respond to driving, pull to the side of the road When the VSA system indicator
Driving
the accelerator in the same way it when it is safe, and turn off the comes on, you will also see a
does at other times. There may also engine. Reset the system by ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ or
be some noise from the VSA restarting the engine. If the VSA ‘‘CHECK HILL START ASSIST
hydraulic system. You will also see system indicator stays on or comes SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
the VSA activation indicator blink. back on while driving, have the VSA information display.
system inspected by your dealer.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all If the indicator does not come on
situations and does not control your when the ignition switch is turned to
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is the ON (II) position, there may be a
still your responsibility to drive and problem with the VSA system. Have
corner at reasonable speeds and to your dealer inspect your vehicle as
leave a sufficient margin of safety. soon as possible.
295
On U.S. models VSA OFF Switch VSA is turned on every time you
If the low tire pressure/TPMS start the engine, even if you turned it
indicator comes on (see page 291 ), off the last time you drove the
or the multi-information display vehicle.
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message with the indicator flashing In certain unusual conditions when
(see page 292 ), the VSA system VSA OFF your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
automatically turns on even if the SWITCH mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
VSA system is turned off with the to free it with the VSA temporarily
VSA OFF switch. In this case, you switched off. When the VSA system
cannot turn the VSA system off by is off, the traction control system is
pressing the VSA OFF switch again. also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
Without VSA, your vehicle will have you are not able to free it when the
normal braking and cornering ability, This switch is under the driver’s side VSA is on.
but it will not have VSA traction and vent. To turn the VSA system on and
stability enhancement. off, press and hold it until you hear a Immediately after freeing your
beep. vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
When VSA is off, the VSA activation your vehicle with the VSA and
indicator comes on as a reminder. traction control systems switched off.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
296
VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist System Hill start assist may not prevent your
Driving with varying tire or wheel Your vehicle is equipped with a hill vehicle from rolling downhill on a
sizes may cause the VSA to start assist feature to help prevent very steep or slippery slope, and will
malfunction. When replacing tires, the vehicle from rolling on inclines not operate on small inclines.
make sure they are of the same size as you move your foot from the
and type as your original tires (see brake pedal to the accelerator. Hill start assist is not a replacement
page 344 ). for the parking brake. If parking
To activate hill start assist, you must your vehicle, ensure that the
If you install winter tires, make sure come to a complete stop and make transmission is in Park, and the
they are the same size as those that sure the shift lever is in any of D, S parking brake is fully applied before
were originally supplied with your or L (either in D or S on models with exiting the vehicle. You should also
vehicle. Exercise the same caution the paddle shifters) when facing turn off the engine before exiting the
Driving
during winter driving as you would if uphill, or reverse when facing vehicle.
your vehicle was not equipped with downhill. Release the brake pedal.
VSA. The brakes remain engaged briefly The VSA system indicator will come
to keep the vehicle from rolling on when there is a problem in the hill
forward or backward while you move start assist system. With the VSA
your foot from the brake pedal to the system indicator on, the hill start
accelerator pedal. Gently apply the assist system will not activate.
accelerator pedal as in normal
driving. Hill start assist will release Hill start assist will still operate even
brake pressure gradually as you when VSA is switched off.
accelerate.
297
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a

trailer. Attempting to do so can void
your warranties.
298
Maintenance
This section explains why it is U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance Safety ....................... 300
important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance, replacement, or Maintenance MinderTM.................. 301
maintained and how to follow basic repair of emissions control Fluid Locations............................... 311
maintenance safety precautions. devices and systems may be done Adding Engine Oil ......................... 312
by any automotive repair Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 314
This section also includes establishment or individual using Engine Coolant ............................... 317
instructions on how to read the parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA Windshield Washers ..................... 319
Maintenance Minder messages on standards. Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 320
the multi-information display, and Continuously Variable
instructions for simple maintenance Transmission (CVT) ............. 320
tasks you may want to take care of Brake Fluid ..................................... 321
yourself. Lights .............................................. 323
Audio Antenna ............................... 333
If you have the skills and tools to Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 333
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Floor Mats ...................................... 333
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 334
to purchase the service manual. See Wiper Blades .................................. 334
page 399 for information on how to Tires ................................................ 340
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Checking the 12 Volt Battery ....... 346
Vehicle Storage .............................. 348
299
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Wear eye protection and Burns from hot parts. Let the
section should be performed by a protective clothing when working engine and exhaust system cool
certified technician or qualified with the battery or compressed air. down before touching any parts.
mechanic.
Injury from moving parts. Do
Important Safety Precautions not run the engine unless
To eliminate potential hazards, read Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
the instructions before you begin, vehicle or failing to correct a
and make sure you have the tools problem before driving can
and skills required. cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
Make sure your vehicle is parked maintenance instructions and
on level ground, the parking brake Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
is set, and the engine is off. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
recommendations and
To clean parts, use a commercially schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
available degreaser or parts manual. and precautions in this owner’s
cleaner, not gasoline. manual.
To reduce the possibility of fire or Potential Vehicle Hazards Some of the most important safety
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, Carbon Monoxide poison from precautions are given here. However,
and flames away from the battery engine exhaust. Be sure there is we cannot warn you of every
and all fuel-related parts. adequate ventilation whenever you conceivable hazard that can arise in
operate the engine. performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
300
Maintenance MinderTM
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items on shown on the display according to
the multi-information display to show ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY this table:
you when you should have your
dealer perform engine oil Calculated Engine Displayed
replacement and indicated Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
maintenance service. 100% − 91% 100%
90% − 81% 90%
Based on the engine operating 80% − 71% 80%
conditions, the onboard computer in 70% − 61% 70%
your vehicle calculates the remaining 60% − 51% 60%
engine oil life and displays it as a 50% − 41% 50%
percentage. REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE 40% − 31% 40%
30% − 21% 30%
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life 20% − 16% 20%
displayed on the multi-information 15% − 11% 15%
display, turn the ignition switch to 10% − 6% 10%
the ON (II) position, and press the 5% − 1% 5%
SEL/RESET button on the steering 0% 0%
wheel repeatedly until the engine oil
life is displayed.
CONTINUED
301
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)

switches the display from the
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S) message to another display. Once SUB ITEM(S)
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Along with the message, the system

message indicator comes on (see
page 70 ).
The message appears on the multi-

information display each time you
MAIN ITEM(S) REMAINING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE(S) turn the ignition switch to the ON OIL LIFE
(II) position.
When the remaining engine oil life is Press the SEL/RESET button on the
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information This message reminds you that your steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE vehicle will soon be due for the engine oil life information. Along
SOON’’ message along with the scheduled maintenance. with the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, you
maintenance item code(s) indicating will see the percentage of the
the main and sub items required at remaining engine oil life and the
the time of the oil change. Refer to maintenance item codes on the
page 310 for a complete list of the multi-information display.
maintenance main items and sub
items.
302

message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Along with the message, the system

message indicator comes on (see
page 70 ).
Maintenance
When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1 Press the SEL/RESET button on the
percent, the multi-information steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE the engine oil life. The message
NOW’’ message with the same ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and the
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE maintenance item code are displayed
SOON’’ was displayed with. When on the multi-information display
you see this message, have the when the calculated engine oil life is
indicated maintenance performed as 1−5 percent (see page 301 ).
soon as possible.
CONTINUED
303
These messages will come on every

time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Immediately have the service

performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 306 .

message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
If the indicated maintenance service Along with the message, the system Press the SEL/RESET button on the
is not done and the remaining engine message indicator comes on (see steering wheel repeatedly to select
oil life reaches 0%, the multi- page 70 ). the engine oil life. The message
information display will show the ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ maintenance item code are displayed
and the maintenance item code(s). on the multi-information display
This message is displayed when the when the calculated engine oil life is
total distance traveled is less than 10 0−1 percent.
miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0%.
304
This message is displayed again

when you drive over 10 miles (for
NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada models) after seeing the 0% message.
Immediately have the service

performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 306 .

message to another display. To see
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S) the message again, press either NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED
INFO button repeatedly.
Maintenance
If the indicated required service is When you press the SEL/RESET
not done and the remaining engine button to select the engine oil life,
oil life becomes 0%, the multi- the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with
information display will show a the maintenance item code(s) and
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message, the total negative distance traveled
the total distance traveled after the after the oil life became 0%, will be
remaining oil life became 0%, and the displayed on the multi-information
maintenance item code(s). display.
305
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life INFO BUTTONS (▲/▼)
Items Display
Your dealer will reset the display
MESSAGE ENGINE OIL LIFE after completing the required
DISPLAY DISPLAY
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by

someone other than your dealer, SEL/RESET BUTTON
reset the Maintenance Minder as LX and EX models
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE follows:
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS 2. If the engine oil life is not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON displayed, press the SEL/RESET
All the maintenance items displayed (II) position. button on the steering wheel
in the multi-information display are repeatedly.
in code.
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
For an explanation of the button on the steering wheel for
maintenance codes, see page 310 . more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multi-
306
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
SEL/RESET INFO BUTTON have an accurate record of when
BUTTON (▲/▼) maintenance is needed.
DX model
4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
Maintenance
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
CONTINUED
307
Your authorized Honda dealer We recommend using Honda parts

knows your vehicle best and can and fluids whenever you have
provide competent, efficient service. maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
However, service at a dealer is not quality standards as the original
mandatory to keep your warranties components, so you can be confident
in effect. Maintenance may be done of their performance and durability.
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
308
U.S. Vehicles: Owner’s Maintenance Checks Lights − Check the operation of

According to state and federal You should check the following all the lights monthly. See page
regulations, failure to perform items at the specified intervals. If 323 .
maintenance on the items marked you are unsure of how to perform
with ＃ will not void your emissions any check, turn to the appropriate
warranties. However, all page listed.
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Engine oil level − Check every
intervals indicated by the multi- time you fill the fuel tank. See
information display. page 251 .
Engine coolant level − Check the

radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 252 .
Maintenance
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
320 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 321 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
340 . CONTINUED
309
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil＊ 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil＊ and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
Driveshaft boots from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA) miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt

Exhaust system＃ 3 Replace transmission fluid
Fuel lines and connections＃ 4 Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
＊ : If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the 5 Replace engine coolant
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column

on page 309 .
NOTE: Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake

fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
310
Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK AUTOMATIC
Maintenance
(Orange loop) TRANSMISSION (CVT)
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID ENGINE COOLANT

(Blue cap) RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
311
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and Recommended Engine Oil
tighten it securely. Wait a few Oil is a major contributor to your
minutes, and recheck the oil level on engine’s performance and longevity.
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
above the upper mark; you could detergent oil displaying the API
damage the engine. Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on the valve cover. Pour the
oil slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
312
Adding Engine Oil
The oil viscosity or weight is Synthetic Oil

API CERTIFICATION SEAL provided on the container’s label. You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the multi-
Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred Ambient Temperature affect the engine or transmission
Maintenance
0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is performance and durability.
highly recommended that you use A very low-viscosity, fuel-efficient
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for 0W-20 oil is the engine lubricant for
optimum engine protection. Make your Insight. This oil is formulated to
sure the API Certification Seal says help your engine use less fuel.
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.
313
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter Changing the oil and filter requires
according to the maintenance special tools and access from
messages shown on the multi- underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
information display. The oil and filter should be raised on a service station-
collect contaminants that can type hydraulic lift for this service.
damage your engine if they are not Unless you have the knowledge and
removed regularly. proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic. SCREW
1. Run the engine until it reaches SCREWS

normal operating temperature, CLIP
then shut it off.
3. Remove the screws with a Phillips-
2. Open the hood, and remove the head screwdriver, and clips with a
engine oil fill cap. flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the
under-cover down.
314
BOLT 6. Install a new oil filter according to

the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,

then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

WASHER OIL FILTER
8. Refill the engine with the
4. Remove the oil drain bolt and 5. Remove the oil filter, and let the recommended oil.
Maintenance
washer from the bottom of the remaining oil drain. A special
engine. Drain the oil into an wrench (available from your Engine oil change capacity
appropriate container. dealer) is required. (including filter):
Make sure the oil filter gasket is 3.4 US qt (3.2 )

not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
CONTINUED
315
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. 11.Turn off the engine, let it sit for
Start the engine. The oil pressure several minutes, then check the oil
indicator should go out within 5 level on the dipstick. If necessary, Improper disposal of engine oil can be
seconds. If it does not, turn off the add more oil. harmf ul to the environment. If you
engine, and check your work. change your own oil, please dispose of
12.Put the under-cover back in place the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
10.Let the engine run for several and reinstall the holding clips and container and take it to a recycling
minutes, then check the drain bolt screws. Lock the clips securely by center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
and oil filter for leaks. pushing on the center of each clip. or dump it on the ground.
316
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti-

freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent If you regularly drive your vehicle
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled under severe conditions in very low
water. Never add straight antifreeze temperature (under −31°F, −35°C), a
or plain water. higher concentration of coolant should
be used. Consult your Honda dealer
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not f or more inf ormation on the proper
available, you may use another coolant.
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
RESERVE TANK recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to between the malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the system flushed and refilled with
cooling system for leaks. Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED
317
Engine Coolant
If the reserve tank is completely 4. The coolant level should be up to

empty, you should also check the the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant level in the radiator. coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and

carefully so you do not spill any.
Removing the radiator cap Clean up any spill immediately; it
while the engine is hot can could damage components in the
cause the coolant to spray out, engine compartment.
seriously scalding you.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
Always let the engine and tighten it fully.
radiator cool down before RADIATOR CAP
removing the radiator cap. 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator Fill it to halfway between the MAX
are cool. and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap Do not add any rust inhibitors or
counterclockwise, without other additives to your vehicle’s
pressing down. cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
3. Remove the radiator cap by engine components.
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
318
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the On all Canadian models

windshield washer reservoir at least If the washer fluid is low, a
monthly during normal use. ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message Do not use engine antif reeze or a
appears on the multi-information vinegar/water solution in the
display. windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality a vinegar/water solution can damage
windshield washer fluid. This the windshield washer pump. Use only
increases the cleaning capability and commercially-available windshield
prevents freezing in cold weather. washer f luid.
When you refill the reservoir, clean

the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
Maintenance
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
On U.S. models
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
319
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut UPPER
HOT MARK
off the engine. For accurate Range
results, wait about 60 seconds (but LOWER
MARK
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2. DIPSTICK
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 4. Remove the dipstick and check
from the transmission, and wipe it the fluid level. There is a HOT
with a clean cloth. side and a COLD side on the
dipstick. The fluid level should be
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into between the upper and lower
the transmission securely as marks on the HOT side.
shown in the illustration.
320
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Brake Fluid
mark, add fluid into the dipstick into the transmission securely. Check the brake fluid level in the
hole to bring it to the level reservoirs monthly.
between the upper and lower The transmission should be drained
marks. and refilled with new fluid when this You will also see the ‘‘BRAKE
service is indicated by a maintenance FLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully message on the multi-information information display when the brake
so you do not spill any. Clean up display. fluid level is low.
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine If you are not sure how to add fluid, Independent of the Maintenance
compartment. contact your dealer. Minder information, replace the
brake fluid every 3 years.
Always use Honda CVTF
(continuously variable
Maintenance
transmission fluid).
CONTINUED
321
Brake Fluid
Always use Honda Heavy Duty MAX

Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can

cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid MIN
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
The fluid level should be between
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not the MIN and MAX marks on the side
compatible with your vehicle’s of the reservoir. If the level is at or
braking system and can cause below the MIN mark, your brake
extensive damage. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
322
Lights
Headlight Aiming High Beam Headlight

The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you HOLDING CLIP
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area, readjustment may be
required. Adjustments should be
done by your dealer or another
qualified technician.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard CONNECTOR
Maintenance
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the electrical connector
cloth. To change the bulb on the right from the cover by pushing on the
side, remove the upper part of the tab to unlock it, then slide the
windshield washer reservoir tank. connector off the cover.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot remove the holding clip, then 3. Remove the cover on the back of
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch remove the upper part by pulling it the headlight assembly by turning
on the glass can cause the bulb to straight up. it counterclockwise.
overheat and shatter.
CONTINUED
323
Lights
6. Install the new bulb, and turn it

one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
CONNECTOR BULB it in place.
7. Push the electrical connector back

onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
8. Reinstall the cover over the back

of the headlight assembly and turn
it clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
COVER onto the cover.
4. Remove the electrical connector 5. Remove the bulb from the 9. Turn on the headlights to test the
from the bulb by pushing on the headlight assembly by turning it new bulb.
tab and pulling the connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
down.
324
Lights
(Right side) Low Beam Headlight 4. Install the new bulb, and turn it
10.Install the upper part of the one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
windshield washer reservoir tank BULB it in place.
in the reverse order of removal.
5. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
CONNECTOR
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the electrical connector

from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
3. Remove the bulb from the

headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
325
Lights
Replacing a Front Parking Light 4. Install the socket back into the
Bulb headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
HOLDING CLIP BULB
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
(Right side)
6. Install the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank
in the reverse order of removal.
SOCKET
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the socket from the

To change the bulb on the right headlight assembly by turning it
side, remove the upper part of the one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
windshield washer reservoir tank.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
remove the holding clip, then socket. Push the new bulb straight
remove the upper part by pulling it into the socket until it bottoms.
straight up.
326
Lights
Replacing the Front Turn Signal 4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
Light Bulb socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
SOCKET BULB
5. Insert the socket back into the
front turn signal light assembly.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
COVER 7. Install the light assembly in the
reverse order of removal. Make
NOTCH BOLTS sure to secure the bolts.
Maintenance
1. Place a cloth on the notch of the 2. Remove the bolts and pull the 8. Install the garnish in the original
light assembly garnish to prevent front turn signal light assembly position securely.
scratches. Remove the cover by from the bumper while taking the
carefully prying in the notch with a tab out from the holder.
flat-tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the socket from the front
turn signal light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
327
Lights
Replacing a Front Side Marker 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its 5. Turn on the lights to make sure
Light Bulb socket. Push the new bulb straight the new bulb is working.
into the socket until it bottoms.
BULB
4. Install the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
SOCKET
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
328
Lights
Replacing the Rear Bulbs
HOOKS CLIP
TRIM
HOOKS
CLIP
Maintenance
1. Open the hatch. 3. Pry on the gap between the trim 4. Make sure that all hooks are
and light assembly carefully with a removed from the light assembly.
2. Push on the area of the trim as flat-tip screwdriver to detach the Unclip the top half of the trim
shown in the illustration above to lower hooks. from the body by pulling it out.
detach the upper hooks from the Then unclip the bottom half.
light assembly.
CONTINUED
329
Lights
BOLT Front
Left side
Front
BULB
ORIGINAL Left side SOCKET

POSITION SNAP FASTENERS
5. Remove the two mounting bolts 6. Pull the rear of the light assembly 8. Pull the whole light assembly
with an 8 mm wrench. out as shown in the illustration outwards from the body carefully.
above ( ), then push the
assembly back to the original 9. Remove the socket by turning it
position carefully ( ). The front one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
part of the rear light assembly
raises slightly ( ). 10.Remove the burned out bulb by
pulling it straight out of its socket.
7. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: back-up light,
turn signal, or side marker.
330
Lights
11.Install the new bulb in the socket

by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.
12.Reinstall the socket into the light

assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
13.Test the lights to make sure the

new bulb is working.
14.When reinstalling the taillight

assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Reinstall and
Maintenance
tighten the two mounting bolts. 15.To reinstall the trim, set the 16.Secure the hooks by pushing on
bottom edge of the trim in the the areas of the trim as shown in
original position and push the the illustration above.
bottom half of the trim to clip it
back securely. Then push the
upper half of the trim to secure
the top clip.
331
Lights
Stop/taillights Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

The stop/taillights should be The license plate has two lights
replaced by your dealer. above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.
Side Turn Signal Lights
EX models High-mount Brake Light
Each outside mirror has side turn The high-mount brake light should
signal lights. The lights should be be replaced by your dealer.
replaced by your dealer.
332
Audio Antenna, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Audio Antenna Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats

LOOP
To unlock
Driver’s floor mat is shown.
Maintenance
Before using an automatic car wash, If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft On LX and EX models
remove the audio antenna so it does brush with a mixture of mild soap The driver’s floor mat that came
not get damaged. Remove the and warm water to clean them. Do with your vehicle hooks over the
antenna by unscrewing it. When you not use bleach, dye, or cleaning floor mat anchors. To lock each
reinstall the antenna, tighten it solvents. Let the belts air dry before anchor, turn the knob clockwise.
securely. you use the vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat forward and possibly interfering with
Before entering or parking in areas belt anchors can cause the belts to the pedals.
with low ceiling height, remove the retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
antenna. the loops with a clean cloth When cleaning or replacing, turn the
dampened in mild soap and warm knob counterclockwise to unhook
water or isopropyl alcohol. the floor mat. CONTINUED
333
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
If you remove a floor mat, make sure Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades
to re-anchor it when you put it back This filter removes the dust and Check the condition of the wiper
in your vehicle. pollen that is brought in from the blades at least every 6 months.
outside through the climate control Replace them if you find signs of
If you use a non-Honda floor mat, system. cracking in the rubber, and areas
make sure it fits properly and that it that are getting hard or if they leave
can be used with the floor mat Have your dealer replace the filter streaks and unwiped areas when
anchors. Do not put additional floor when this service is indicated by a used.
mats on top of the anchored mats. maintenance message on the multi-
information display. It should be
Make sure the rear floor mats are replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
properly positioned. If not, the floor km) if you drive primarily in urban
mat will interfere with the seat areas that have high concentrations
operation and make the front of soot in the air, or if the flow from
passenger’s weight sensors the climate control system becomes
ineffective. less than usual.
334
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM
WIPER ARMS COVER
To replace a wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly Pivot the blade assembly toward
Maintenance
from the wiper arm: the wiper arm until it releases
1. Raise each wiper arm off the from the wiper arm.
windshield, lifting the driver’s side Put a cloth on the edge of the
first, then the passenger’s side. lock tab to prevent scratches, When replacing a wiper blade,
then push up on the lock tab make sure not to drop the wiper
carefully with a flat-tip blade or wiper arm down on the
screwdriver. windshield.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED
335
Wiper Blades
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If

BLADE they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
BLADE
3. Remove the blade from its holder 5. Place the top of the wiper blade on
by grabbing the tabbed end of the the end of the blade assembly, and
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs slide the blade onto the assembly.
come out of the holder. Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
REINFORCEMENT
Make sure the two rubber tabs

inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
336
Wiper Blades
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly REAR

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Make sure the blade is completely

installed and that its edge is not
bunched up.
8. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
COVER
To replace a rear wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
Maintenance
from the wiper arm by pulling up
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear the cover.
window.
CONTINUED
337
Wiper Blades
5. Examine the new wiper blades. If

WIPER ARM BLADE they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
REINFORCEMENT
TOP
BLADE
3. Push the blade assembly toward 4. Remove the blade from its holder
the base of the arm. by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
When replacing a wiper blade, come out of the holder.
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Make sure the two rubber tabs

inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
338
Wiper Blades
7. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
8. Make sure the blade is completely

installed and that its edge is not
bunched up.
9. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield.
6. Place the top of the wiper blade on
Maintenance
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
CONTINUED
339
Tires
Tires Inflation Guidelines On U.S. models

To safely operate your vehicle, your Keeping the tires properly inflated Even though your vehicle is
tires must be the proper type and provides the best combination of equipped with TPMS, we
size, in good condition with adequate handling, tread life, and riding recommend that you visually check
tread, and correctly inflated. comfort. your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
The following pages give more Underinflated tires wear unevenly, immediately with a tire gauge.
detailed information on how to take adversely affect handling and fuel
care of your tires and what to do economy, and are more likely to Use a gauge to measure the air
when they need to be replaced. fail from being overheated. pressure in each tire at least once a
Overinflated tires can make your month. Even tires that are in good
vehicle ride more harshly, are condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
more prone to damage from road 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
Using tires that are excessively hazards, and wear unevenly. month. Remember to check the
worn or improperly inflated can spare tire at the same time.
cause a crash in which you can On U.S. models
be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system Check the air pressures when the
(TPMS) warns you when a tire tires are cold. This means the
Follow all instructions in this pressure is low. See page 291 for vehicle has been parked for at least 3
owner’s manual regarding tire more information. hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
inflation and maintenance. On all Canadian models km). Add or release air, if needed, to
We recommend that you visually match the recommended cold tire
check your tires every day. If you pressures.
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
340
Tires
If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection
tires are hot (driven for several The following chart shows the Every time you check inflation, you
miles/kilometers), you will see recommended cold tire pressures for should also examine the tires for
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 most normal driving conditions. damage, foreign objects, and wear.
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure You should look for:
air out to match the recommended P185/60R15 84T Front/Rear:
cold air pressure. The tire will be 33 psi (230 kPa , Bumps or bulges in the tread or
underinflated. 2.3 kgf/cm ) side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
You should get your own tire The compact spare tire pressure is:
pressure gauge and use it whenever 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
you check your tire pressures. This of the tire. Replace the tire if you
will make it easier for you to tell if a For convenience, the recommended can see fabric or cord.
Maintenance
pressure loss is due to a tire problem tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
and not due to a variation between on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. Excessive tread wear.
gauges.
For additional information about
While tubeless tires have some your tires, see page 384 .
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
341
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

Tire Service Life Tire Maintenance
The service life of your tires is In addition to proper inflation,
dependent on many factors, correct wheel alignment helps to
including, but not limited to, driving decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
habits, road conditions, vehicle is worn unevenly, have your dealer
loading, inflation pressure, check the wheel alignment.
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even Have your dealer check the tires if
when the tires are not in use). you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
In addition to your regular rebalanced if it is removed from the
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR inspections and inflation pressure wheel. When you have new tires
maintenance, it is recommended that installed, make sure they are
Your tires have wear indicators you have annual inspections balanced. This increases riding
molded into the tread. When the performed once the tires reach five comfort and tire life. For best results,
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 years old. It is also recommended have the installer perform a dynamic
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the that all tires, including the spare, be balance.
tread. This shows there is less than removed from service after 10 years
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on from the date of manufacture,
the tire. regardless of their condition or state
of wear. Improper wheel weights can damage
A tire this worn gives very little The last four digits of the TIN (tire your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
traction on wet roads. You should identification number) are found on only Honda wheel weights f or
replace the tire if you can see three the sidewall of the tire and indicate balancing.
or more tread wear indicators. the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 385 ).
342
Tires
Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels It is best to replace all four tires at
Replace your tires with radial tires of the same time. If that is not possible
Front Front the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front
rating, and maximum cold tire tires or two rear tires as a pair.
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tire can seriously
tire’s sidewall). affect your vehicle’s handling.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on If you ever replace a wheel, make
your vehicle can reduce braking sure that the wheel’s specifications
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheels.
accuracy. Using tires of a different
(Front Non-directional (Front Directional size or construction can cause the On U.S. models
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist Also be sure you use only TPMS
system (VSA) to work inconsistently. specific wheels. If you do not, the
Maintenance
To help increase tire life and tire pressure monitoring system will
distribute wear more evenly, rotate The ABS and VSA system work by not work.
the tires according to the comparing the speed of each wheel.
maintenance messages displayed on When replacing tires, use the same Replacement wheels are available at
the multi-information display. Move size originally supplied with the your dealer.
the tires to the positions shown in vehicle. Tire size and construction
the illustration each time they are can affect wheel speed and may
rotated. If you purchase directional cause the system to activate.
tires, rotate only front-to-back.
CONTINUED
343
Tires
Winter Driving Tire Chains

Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All Mount tire chains on your tires when
Installing improper tires on your Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- required by driving conditions or
vehicle can affect handling and weather tread design suitable for local laws. Install them only on the
stability. This can cause a crash most winter driving conditions. front tires.
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed. For the best performance in snowy Because your vehicle has limited tire
or icy conditions, you should install clearance, Honda strongly
Always use the size and type of snow tires or tire chains. They may recommends using the chains listed
tires recommended in this be required by local laws under below, made by Security Chain
owner’s manual. certain conditions. Company (SCC).
Snow Tires Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN

Wheel and Tire Specifications If you mount snow tires on your SC1026
Wheels: vehicle, make sure they are radial
15 x 6J tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
Tires: all four wheels. The traction
P185/60R15 84T provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
See page 384 for DOT tire quality Check with the tire dealer for
grading information, and page maximum speed recommendations.
384 for tire size information.
344
Tires
When installing cables, follow the Wheels

manufacturer’s instructions, and Clean the wheels as you would the
mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not rest of the exterior. Wash them with
Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can the same solution, and rinse them
the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and thoroughly.
slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can
hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed. If equipped
the body or chassis, stop and Aluminum alloy wheels have a
investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this protective clear-coat that keeps the
you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the aluminum from corroding and
selection and use of tire chains. tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
Traction devices that are the wrong brush can damage the clear-coat. To
Maintenance
size or improperly installed can clean the wheels, use a mild
damage your vehicle’s brake lines, detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
345
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a

white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a The battery gives off explosive
solution of baking soda and water. It hydrogen gas during normal
will bubble up and turn brown. When operation.
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a A spark or flame can cause the
cloth or paper towel. Coat the battery to explode with enough
terminals with grease to help prevent force to kill or seriously hurt you.
further corrosion.
Wear protective clothing and a
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional 12 volt battery face shield, or have a skilled
maintenance is needed, see your technician do the battery
Check the condition of the 12 volt dealer or a qualified technician. maintenance.
battery monthly by looking at the
test indicator window. The label on WARNING: Battery posts,
the battery explains the test terminals, and related accessories If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is
indicator’s colors. contain lead and lead compounds. disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
Wash your hands after handling. battery level gauge reading will not
be correct the next time you turn the
If you need to connect the battery to ignition switch to the ON (II)
a charger, disconnect both cables to position. It will show less than the
prevent damaging your vehicle’s actual level temporarily. It will show
electrical system. Always disconnect the correct level after you drive for
the negative (−) cable first, and at least 30 minutes.
reconnect it last.
346
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
If your vehicle’s battery is On vehicles with navigation system

disconnected, or goes dead, the time The navigation system will also
setting may be lost. To reset the time, disable itself. The next time you turn
see page 222 . on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
If your vehicle’s battery is before it can be used. Refer to the
disconnected or goes dead, the audio navigation system manual.
system may disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio, you will
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
221 ).
Maintenance
347
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for If the vehicle is to be stored for a cotton. Non-porous materials, such
an extended period (more than 1 longer period, it should be as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
month), there are several things you supported on jackstands so the which can damage the paint.
should do to prepare it for storage. tires are off the ground.
Proper preparation helps prevent Reconnect the 12 volt battery and
deterioration and makes it easier to Leave one window open slightly (if drive your vehicle every month for
get your vehicle back on the road. If the vehicle is being stored about 30 minutes. This will keep
possible, store your vehicle indoors. indoors). the IMA battery charged and in
good condition.
Fill the fuel tank. Disconnect the 12 volt battery.
If possible, periodically run the
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front and rear wiper engine until it reaches full
completely. blade arms with a folded towel or operating temperature (the
rag so they do not touch the cooling fans cycle on and off
Clean the interior. Make sure the windshield. twice). Preferably, do this once a
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are month.
completely dry. To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
Leave the parking brake off. Put and hatch seals. Also, apply a
the transmission in Park. vehicle body wax to the painted If this vehicle is unused f or over one
surfaces that mate with the door month, the service lif e of the 100V
Block the rear wheels. and hatch seals. Nickel-Metal Hydride battery will be
reduced and the battery may be
Cover the vehicle with a permanently damaged.
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
348
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 350

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 351
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 358
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 360
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 362
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 365
stranded you on the side of the road, 12 Volt Battery Charging System
you may be able to get going again. Indicator ...................................... 366
If not, you will also find instructions Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 367
on getting your vehicle towed. Brake System Indicator ................ 368
Fuses ............................................... 369
Fuse Locations ............................... 374
Emergency Towing ....................... 376
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 377

349
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare tire.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use your compact spare
soon as you can. tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you On U.S. models
check the other tires. It should be After the flat tire is replaced with
inflated to: the spare tire, the low tire
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) pressure/TPMS indicator stays on
while driving. After several miles TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: (kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). again. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK the tread wear indicator bars. The
TPMS SYSTEM’’ message on the replacement tire should be the same
This tire gives a harsher ride and multi-information display. This is size and design, mounted on the
less traction on some road normal; the system cannot same wheel. The spare tire is not
surfaces. Use greater caution monitor the spare tire pressure. designed to be mounted on a regular
while driving. Manually check the spare tire wheel, and the spare wheel is not
pressure to be sure it is correct. designed for mounting a regular tire.
350
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, TAB

stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until The vehicle can easily roll off HOLDER
you get to an exit or an area to stop the jack, seriously injuring
that is far away from the traffic lanes. anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
FLOOR
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 3. Open the hatch.

non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the 4. Remove the cargo area floor by

parking brake. carefully pulling the front edge of
the floor straight up.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
351
BOX JACK KNOB
SPARE TIRE
CASING SPARE TIRE COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH
5. Take the box out of the spare tire. 8. Remove the jack compartment 10.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
cover by pulling the knob. with the wheel nut wrench.
6. Take the spare tire casing out of
the cargo area. 9. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
7. Unscrew the wing bolt and take remove the jack.
the spare tire out of its well.
352
JACKING POINTS EXTENSION WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION
11.Place the jack under the jacking Insight and LX models 13.Use the extension and the wheel
point nearest the tire you need to 12.Remove the wheel cover by nut wrench as shown to raise the
change. Turn the end bracket carefully prying under its edge vehicle until the flat tire is off the

clockwise until the top of the jack with the flat tip of the extension. ground.
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is 14.Remove the wheel nuts, then
resting in the jack notch. remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
CONTINUED
353
BRAKE HUB 16.Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
17.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
15.Before mounting the spare tire, 18.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
wipe any dirt off the mounting the same crisscross pattern. Have
surface of the wheel and hub with the wheel nut torque checked at
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub the nearest automotive service
carefully; it may be hot from facility.
driving. Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
354
CARPET BOX For normal tire

WING BOLT
SPARE TIRE For compact

CENTER CAP CASING SPACER CONE spare tire
EX models 20.Place the flat tire face down in the 23.Remove the spacer cone from the
19.Remove the center cap (if spare tire well. wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
equipped) before storing the flat back on the bolt.

tire in the cargo area well. 21.Remove the carpet from the spare
tire casing and store it in the 24.Secure the flat tire by screwing
casing. the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the box in the wheel of the
22.Install the spare tire casing in the flat tire.
original position in the spare tire
well.
CONTINUED
355
25.Store the tools in the spare tire

casing and the jack in its holder.
Turn the jack’s end bracket Loose items can fly around the
clockwise to lock it in place, and interior in a crash and could
reinstall the cover. seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools

securely before driving.
26.Store the center cap in the cargo

area. Make sure it does not get FLOOR
scratched or damaged.
27.Place the cargo area floor in its
original position. Close the hatch.
U.S. models only

28.Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 293 ).
356
Installing a wheel cover
CLIPS CLIPS WIRE SUPPORT RING
Insight and LX models 2. Align the valve mark on the wheel 3. Make sure the wire support ring is
1. Make sure the wire support ring is cover to the tire valve on the on the outer side of the tire valve

hooked into the clips around the wheel, then install the wheel cover. as shown.
edge of the wheel cover.
357
If the Engine Won’t Start
The engine normally starts with the Are you using a properly coded Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
IMA motor. If the engine does not key? An improperly coded key will gauge; the low fuel indicator may
start while the IMA battery charge is cause the immobilizer system not be working.
normally sufficient, check the indicator in the instrument panel
following: to blink rapidly (see page 130 ). There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
Check the transmission interlock. Are you using the proper starting fuel pump. Check all the fuses
The transmission must be in Park procedure? Refer to Starting the (see page 369 ).
or neutral or the starter will not Engine on page 265 .
operate.
358
If the Engine Won’t Start
When the IMA battery charge is low, If the headlights dim noticeably or If you find nothing wrong, you will
the starter motor is used to start the go out when you try to start the need a qualified technician to find
engine. If the engine does not start, engine, either the 12 volt battery is the problem. See Emergency
check the following: discharged or the connections are Towing on page 376 .
corroded. Check the condition of
Turn the ignition switch to the ON the 12 volt battery and terminal
(II) position. Turn on the connections (see page 346 ). You
headlights, and check their can then try jump starting the
brightness. If the headlights are vehicle from a booster 12 volt
very dim or do not come on at all, battery (see page 360 ).
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 360 .
Turn the ignition switch to the

START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the

condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 376 .
359
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle:

procedure, you should take several
precautions. 1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the 12 volt
battery.
A battery can explode if you do

not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
nearby. electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen BOOSTER
Keep all sparks, open flames, battery can cause it to rupture. BATTERY
and smoking materials away
from the battery. 2. Turn off all the electrical The numbers in the illustration show
accessories: climate control, audio you the order to connect the jumper
system, lights, etc. Put the cables.
You cannot start your vehicle by transmission in Park, and set the
pushing or pulling it. parking brake.
360
Jump Starting
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter

motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once your vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables

3. Connect one jumper cable to the 4. Connect the second jumper cable away from each other and any metal
positive (＋) terminal on your to the negative (−) terminal on on the vehicle until everything is
battery. Connect the other end to the booster battery. Connect the disconnected. Otherwise, you may

the positive (＋) terminal on the other end to the grounding strap cause an electrical short.
booster battery. as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
CONTINUED
361
Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is If the Engine Overheats If the vehicle overheats, you should
disconnected or goes dead, the IMA The high temperature indicator take immediate action. The only
battery level gauge reading will not should be off under most conditions. indication may be the high
be correct the next time you turn the If the engine coolant temperature temperature indicator blinking or
ignition switch to the ON (II) gets higher than normal, the remaining on. Or you may see steam
position. It will show less than the indicator will blink. If it stays on, you or spray coming from under the
actual level temporarily. It will show should determine the reason (hot hood.
the correct level after you drive for day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
at least 30 minutes.
You will also see a ‘‘WATER TEMP
HOT’’ message on the multi- Driving with the high temperature
information display (see page 67 ). indicator on can cause serious damage
to your engine.
362
If the Engine Overheats
2. If you see steam and/or spray 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
coming from under the hood, turn such as a split radiator hose.
Steam and spray from an off the engine. Wait until you see Everything is still extremely hot,
overheated engine can no more signs of steam or spray, so use caution. If you find a leak, it
seriously scald you. then open the hood. must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Do not open the hood if steam 3. If you do not see steam or spray, Towing on page 376 ).
is coming out. leave the engine running, and
check the high temperature 6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
indicator. If the high heat is due to check the coolant level in the
1. Safely pull to the side of the road. overloading, the engine should radiator reserve tank (see page
Put the transmission in Park, and start to cool down almost 252 ). Add coolant if the level is
set the parking brake. Turn off all immediately. If it does, wait until below the MIN mark.
the accessories, and turn on the the high temperature indicator
hazard warning lights. goes off, then continue driving. 7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add

4. If the high temperature indicator coolant to the radiator. Let the
stays on, turn off the engine. engine cool down until the high
temperature indicator goes off
before checking the radiator.
CONTINUED
363
If the Engine Overheats
9. Start the engine, and set the 11.If the temperature stays normal,
temperature to maximum heat check the coolant level in the
Removing the radiator cap (climate control to AUTO at radiator reserve tank. If it has
while the engine is hot can ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the gone down, add coolant to the
cause the coolant to spray out, radiator up to the base of the filler MAX mark. Put the cap back on
seriously scalding you. neck. If you do not have the tightly.
proper coolant mixture available,
Always let the engine and you can add plain water.
radiator cool down before Remember to have the cooling
removing the radiator cap. system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap 10.Put the radiator cap back on
counterclockwise, without pushing tightly. Run the engine, and check
down, to the first stop. After the the high temperature indicator. If
pressure releases, push down on it begins to blink or comes on
the cap, and turn it until it comes again, the engine needs repair
off. (see Emergency Towing on page
376 ).
364
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut The engine running generates the oil
come on when the engine is off the engine. Turn on the hazard pressure. When the Auto Idle Stop is
running. If it starts flashing or stays warning lights. activated, the engine is stopped, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very oil pressure is dropped, and the low
low or lost pressure. Serious engine 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. oil pressure indicator does not come
damage is possible, and you should Open the hood, and check the oil on.
take immediate action. level (see page 251 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK during cornering and other driving
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on maneuvers.
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on. 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
The indicator notifies you of low oil dipstick (see page 312 ).
pressure and does not measure the
oil level. Check your vehicle’s oil 4. Start the engine and watch the oil

level at each refueling. pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
Running the engine with low oil before you can continue driving
pressure can cause serious mechanical (see Emergency Towing on page
damage almost immediately. Turn of f 376 ).
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
365
12 Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
If the charging system This indicator may blink after you

indicator comes on brightly start the vehicle in the morning
when the engine is running, the 12 when the temperature is below
volt battery is not being charged. −20°F (−30°C). It will stop
blinking when the IMA battery
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK warms up.
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 89 ).
Immediately turn off all electrical

accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage

where you can get technical
assistance.
366
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If the indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If your vehicle’s battery has been
while driving, it means one even though it may turn off as you disconnected or gone dead, these
of the engine’s emissions control continue driving, have your vehicle codes are erased. It can take several
systems may have a problem. Even checked by your dealer as soon as days of driving under various
though you may feel no difference in possible. conditions to set the codes again.
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause To check if they are set, turn the
increased emissions. Continued ignition switch to the ON (II)
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the position, without starting the engine.
Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you The malfunction indicator lamp will
If you have recently refueled your can damage your vehicle’s emissions come on for 20 seconds. If it then
vehicle, the indicator coming on controls and engine. Those repairs may goes off, the readiness codes are set.
could be due to a loose or missing not be covered by your vehicle’s If it blinks five times, the readiness
fuel fill cap. You will also see a warranties. This indicator may also codes are not set. If possible, do not
‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message on come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator. take your vehicle for an emissions
the multi-information display. test until the readiness codes are set.

Tighten the cap until it clicks at least Readiness Code Refer to Emissions Testing for
once (see page 249 ). Tightening the Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness more information (see page 392 ).
cap will not turn the indicator off codes’’ that are part of the on-board
immediately; it can take several days diagnostics for the emissions You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
of normal driving. systems. In some states, part of the EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
emissions testing is to make sure the multi-information display. For
these codes are set. If they are not more information, see page 89 .
set, the test cannot be completed.
367
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada However, if the brake pedal does not If this indicator comes on for any
(Red) feel normal, you should take other reason, have your vehicle
immediate action. A problem in one inspected by your dealer. There may
The brake system indicator normally part of the system’s dual circuit be a malfunction with the electric
comes on when you turn the ignition design will still give you braking at brake distribution (EBD) system.
switch to the ON (II) position and as two wheels. You will feel the brake Avoid hard braking and high speed
a reminder to check the parking pedal go down much farther before driving.
brake. If you do not release the the vehicle begins to slow down, and
parking brake, the indicator will stay you will have to press harder on the You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
on, and you will see a ‘‘RELEASE pedal. LOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
multi-information display. Slow down and pull to the side of the information display (see page 89 ).
road when it is safe. Because of the
If the brake system indicator comes long distance needed to stop, it is If you must drive the vehicle a short
on while driving, the brake fluid level hazardous to drive the vehicle. You distance in this condition, drive
is probably low. Press lightly on the should have it towed and repaired as slowly and carefully.
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. soon as possible (see Emergency
If it does, check the brake fluid level Towing on page 376 ). If the ABS indicator comes on with
the next time you stop at a service the brake system indicator, have
station (see page 321 ). your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
368
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
COVER
LABEL
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in The interior fuse box label is
three fuse boxes. attached on the back side of the
cover. To see the interior fuse box

The interior fuse box is behind the label, remove the cover by pulling it
dashboard on the driver’s side. toward you while holding the bottom
center part of cover.
CONTINUED
369
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD TAB Next to the battery

(On the battery)
TAB
The under-hood fuse is on the The under-hood fuse box is located

positive terminal of the battery. To next to the battery. To open it, push
open it, push the tabs as shown. the tab as shown.
370
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE PULLER

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
374 and 375 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works. BLOWN
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 2. Remove the cover from the under- 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the hood fuse box located on the under-hood fuse boxes and all the
headlights and all other battery (see page 370 ). fuses in the interior fuse box by

accessories are off. pulling out each one with the fuse
3. Check each of the large fuses in puller provided in the interior fuse
the under-hood fuse box on the 12 box.
volt battery by looking through
the top at the wire inside.
Replacement of these fuses should
be done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
371
Fuses
FUSE PULLER
If you cannot drive the vehicle
BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a

spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
5. Look for a blown wire inside the The fuse puller is in the interior fuse Replace the fuse with one of the
fuse. If it is blown, replace the fuse box. correct rating as soon as you can.
with one of the spare fuses of the
same rating or lower.
372
Fuses
Replacing a f use with one that has a

higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the

same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle

checked by a qualified technician.
When the audio system is disabled,

the clock setting in the audio system
is canceled. You need to reset the
clock according to the instructions in
the audio system section in this
owner’s manual.
373
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 15 A Back Up 23 10 A Hazard
2 (7.5 A) TPMS＊ 24 10 A Stop/Horn
3 20 A Driver’s Power Window 25 − Not Used
4 − Not Used 26 10 A LAF
5 10 A Back Up Light 27 30 A Door Lock Main
6 10 A SRS 28 20 A Headlight Main
7 10 A Transmission SOL 29 10 A Small Light
8 7.5 A OPDS 30 30 A Radiator Fan Motor
9 − Not Used 31 7.5 A IGPS
10 7.5 A A/C 32 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam
11 7.5 A ABS/VSA 33 20 A IG Coil
12 10 A IMA 34 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam
13 20 A ACC Socket 35 15 A Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock)
14 7.5 A Accessory 36 15 A Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock)
15 7.5 A Daytime Running Light 37 30 A ABS/VSA FSR
16 10 A Rear Wiper 38 15 A Selectable Door Lock
17 20 A Front Passenger’s Power 39 15 A IGP
Window 40 − Not Used
18 20 A Rear Passenger’s Side 41 − Not Used
Power Window 42 10 A IMA 1
19 20 A Rear Driver’s Side Power 43 7.5 A MG Clutch
Window 44 7.5 A STS
20 15 A Fuel Pump
21 15 A Washer ＊ : U.S. models
22 7.5 A Meter
374
Fuse Locations
No. Amps. Circuits Protected UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES

45 7.5 A Hatch Lock
46 − Not Used On the battery Next to the battery
47 30 A Condenser Fan Motor
48 10 A Left Headlight High Beam
49 15 A Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)
50 15 A Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)
51 10 A Right Headlight High Beam
52 15 A DBW
53 10 A IMA 2
54 − Not Used
55 10 A Heated Mirror＊2, ＊3
56 30 A Front Wiper
57 30 A Blower Motor
58 30 A ABS/VSA Motor
59 30 A Rear Defogger＊1 No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

40 A Rear Defogger＊2, ＊3 1 100 A Battery, Main, ACG 1 15 A Ignition Coil (EX)
60 − Not Used 2 60 A EPS 2 15 A Ignition Coil (IN)
50 A IG Main 3 20 A Horn, Stop, Hazard
＊1 : Insight model and U.S. LX model

＊2 : Canadian models
＊3 : EX models
375
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the
dangerous. Start the engine. above procedure exactly. If you cannot
Shift to the D position and hold for shif t the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your 5 seconds, then to N. engine, your vehicle must be
vehicle: Turn off the engine. transported with the f ront wheels of f
Release the parking brake. the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator Leave the ignition switch in the
loads your vehicle on the back of a ACCESSORY (I) position so the With the front wheels on the ground,
truck. This is the best way to steering wheel does not lock. it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
transport your vehicle. than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground. This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
376
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the mud, or snow, call a towing service
bumpers will cause serious damage. to pull it out (see page 376 ).
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight. For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin To use the towing hook:
towing.
1. Remove the cover from the front

bumper using your fingers, or pry
it off using a cloth and a flat-tip
screwdriver to prevent scratches.
2. Remove the towing hook and

wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the cargo area.
CONTINUED
377
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
3. Screw the towing hook into the

hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
378
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 380 Emissions Controls........................ 389
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 382 The Clean Air Act ...................... 389
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 384 System..................................... 389
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading ................................... 384 System..................................... 389
emissions control systems. Treadwear .................................. 384 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Traction....................................... 384 Recovery ................................. 389
Temperature .............................. 385 Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 390
Tire Labeling .................................. 385 PGM-FI System ..................... 390
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Ignition Timing Control
(TPMS) − Required Federal System................................. 390
Explanation............................. 387 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 390
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 390
Replacement Parts..................... 390
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 391
Emissions Testing ......................... 392
379
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the COVER
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
The VIN is also located on the

engine bulkhead. Remove the cover
on the engine compartment
bulkhead to view the VIN. Always CERTIFICATION LABEL
close the cover when finished.
380
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

the engine block.
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
The IMA Motor Number is stamped

on the motor housing.
ENGINE NUMBER
IMA MOTOR NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
381
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 172.3 in (4,377 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 66.7 in (1,695 mm) 10.6 US gal (40 )
Height 56.2 in (1,427 mm) Engine Change＊1 1.165 US gal (4.41 )
Wheelbase 100.4 in (2,550 mm) coolant Total 1.295 US gal (4.90 )
Track Front 58.3 in (1,481 mm) Engine oil Change＊2
Rear 58.0 in (1,472 mm) Including filter 3.4 US qt (3.2 )
Without filter 3.2 US qt (3.0 )
Weights Total 4.0 US qt (3.8 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
to the driver’s doorjamb. transmission Total 5.5 US qt (5.2 )
fluid (CVTF)
Seating Capacities Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Total 5 washer Canada Vehicles 4.76 US qt (4.50 )
Front 2 reservoir
Rear 3
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Engine engine
Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC Reserve tank capacity: 0.116 US gal (0.44 )
i-VTEC gasoline engine with ＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Hybrid Electric Motor
Bore x Stroke 2.87 x 3.15 in (73.0 x 80.0 mm)
Displacement 82 cu-in (1,339 cm )
Compression ratio 10.8 : 1
Spark plugs DILFR6J11 (NGK)
382
Specifications
Air Conditioning 12 Volt Battery

Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity 12 V − 35 AH/20 HR
Charge quantity 15.8−17.6 oz (450−500 g) 12 V − 28 AH/5 HR
Lubricant oil type SP-10
Fuses
Lights Interior See page 374 or the fuse label
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) attached to the inside of the fuse
Low 12 V − 55 W (H11) box door under the steering
Front turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W (Amber) column.
Front parking lights 12 V − 5 W Under-hood See page 375 or the fuse box
Front side marker lights 12 V − 5 W cover.
Side turn signal lights LED type＊2
(door mirror)＊1 Alignment
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W (Amber) Toe-in Front 0 ± 0.12 in (0 ± 3 mm)
Stop/taillights LED type＊2 Rear in 0.10 ± 0.10 in (2.5 ± 2.5 mm)
Back-up lights 12 V − 16 W Camber Front 0° ± 1°
Rear side marker lights 12 V − 2 CP Rear −1.5° ± 1°
License plate lights 12 V − 5 W Caster Front 3°30’ ± 0.5°
Spot lights＊1 ＊3 12 V − 8 W
Ceiling light 12 V − 8 W Tires
Cargo area light 12 V − 5 W Size Front/Rear P185/60R15 84T
High-mount brake light LED type＊2 Spare T135/80D15 99M
Glove box light＊1 12 V − 3.4 W Pressure Front/Rear 33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
＊1 : EX models
＊2 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.
＊3 : LX model
383
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
384
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for Tire Labeling

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that The tires that came on your vehicle
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not have a number of markings. Those
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed, you should be aware of are described
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading, below.
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure. (1)
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the (1)
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. (4) (3) (2)
(1) Tire Size
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
CONTINUED
385
Tire Labeling
Tire Size 84 − Load index (a numerical code 2KNR − Tire type code.
Whenever tires are replaced, they associated with the maximum
should be replaced with tires of the load the tire can carry). 2202 − Date of manufacture.
same size. Following is an example Year
of tire size with an explanation of T − Speed symbol (an Week
what each component means. alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating). Glossary of Tire Terminology
P185/60R15 84T
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air
P − Vehicle type (P indicates The tire identification number (TIN) pressure when the vehicle has been
passenger vehicle). is a group of numbers and letters parked for at least three hours or
that look like the following example. driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
185 − Tire width in millimeters. TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire. Load Rating − Means the maximum
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section load that a tire is rated to carry for a
height as a percentage of its DOT EUYU 2KNR 2202 given inflation pressure.
width).
DOT − This indicates that the tire Maximum Inflation Pressure − The
R − Tire construction code (R meets all requirements of maximum tire air pressure that the
indicates radial). the U.S. Department of tire can hold.
Transportation.
15 − Rim diameter in inches.
EUYU − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
386
Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Maximum Load Rating − Means the Tire Pressure Monitoring System As an added safety feature, your
load rating for a tire at the maximum (TPMS) − Required Federal vehicle has been equipped with a tire
permissible inflation pressure for Explanation pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that tire. U.S. models only that illuminates a low tire pressure
Each tire, including the spare (if telltale
Recommended Inflation Pressure − provided), should be checked
The cold tire inflation pressure monthly when cold and inflated to
recommended by the manufacturer. the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the when one or more of your tires is
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) − vehicle placard or tire inflation significantly under-inflated.
Means the projections within the pressure label.
principal grooves designed to give a Accordingly, when the low tire
visual indication of the degrees of (If your vehicle has tires of a pressure telltale illuminates, you
wear of the tread. different size than the size indicated should stop and check your tires as
on the vehicle placard or tire soon as possible, and inflate them to
inflation pressure label, you should the proper pressure.
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
CONTINUED
387
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Driving on a significantly under- Your vehicle has also been equipped TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
inflated tire causes the tire to with a TPMS malfunction indicator variety of reasons, including the
overheat and can lead to tire failure. to indicate when the system is not installation of replacement or
Under-inflation also reduces fuel operating properly. The TPMS alternate tires or wheels on the
efficiency and tire tread life, and may malfunction indicator is combined vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
affect the vehicle’s handling and with the low tire pressure telltale. functioning properly.
stopping ability. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Always check the TPMS malfunction
Please note that the TPMS is not a approximately one minute and then telltale after replacing one or more
substitute for proper tire remain continuously illuminated. tires or wheels on your vehicle to
maintenance, and it is the driver’s This sequence will continue upon ensure that the replacement or
responsibility to maintain correct tire subsequent vehicle start-ups as long alternate tires and wheels allow the
pressure, even if under-inflation has as the malfunction exists. TPMS to continue to function
not reached the level to trigger properly.
illumination of the TPMS low tire When the malfunction indicator is
pressure telltale. illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
388
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
389
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
390
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS Always use unleaded gasoline.
contains precious metals that serve Even a small amount of leaded
as catalysts, promoting chemical gasoline can contaminate the
reactions to convert the exhaust catalyst metals, making the three
gasses without affecting the metals. way catalytic converter ineffective.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts Keep the engine well maintained.
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part Have your vehicle diagnosed and
or its equivalent. repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
The three way catalytic converter U.S. model is shown. running properly.
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take The defective three way catalytic
place. It can set on fire any converters contribute to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s
near it. Park your vehicle away from performance. Follow these
high grass, dry leaves, or other guidelines to protect your vehicle’s
flammables. three way catalytic converters.
391
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the 5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by hold it there for about 3 minutes.
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following.
systems. These codes are erased 6. Without touching the accelerator
when the battery is disconnected, 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, pedal, let the engine idle for 20
and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around seconds.
of driving under a variety of 3/4).
conditions.
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient

temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
392
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban

major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the
D. Do not use the cruise control. accelerator pedal or the brake
When traffic allows, drive for 90 pedal.
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed 9. Make sure the vehicle has been
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If parked with the engine off for 30
you cannot do this for a minutes.
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least If the testing facility determines the
30 seconds, then repeat it two readiness codes are still not set, see
more times (for a total of 90 your dealer.
seconds).
393
394
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 396

Warranty Coverages ..................... 397
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 398
Authorized Manuals ...................... 399

395
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Honda Canada Inc. us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Customer Relations
If you encounter a problem that your 180 Honda Boulevard Vehicle Identification Number
dealership does not solve to your Markham, ON (see page 380 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with L6C 0H9
the dealership’s management. The Name and address of the dealer
service manager or general manager Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 who services your vehicle
can help. Almost all problems are Fax: 1-877-939-0909
solved in this way. E-Mail: honda_cr@ch.honda.com Date of purchase
If you are dissatisfied with the In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Odometer reading of your vehicle
decision made by the dealership’s Islands:
management, contact Honda Bella International Your name, address, and tele-
Customer Service. P.O. Box 190816 phone number
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
U.S. Owners: A detailed description of the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Tel: (787) 620-7546 problem
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Name of the dealer who sold the
1919 Torrance Boulevard vehicle to you
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
396
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty − for details.

covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the emissions control systems and Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty − provides
accessories, against defects in − all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
materials and workmanship. covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
inside for the specified time period vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects with no mileage limit.
Warranty and Emissions Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Performance Warranty − these two Accessory Limited Warranty − all these warranties. Please read the
warranties cover your vehicle’s Honda accessories are covered 2012 Honda warranty information
emissions control systems. Time, under this warranty. Time and booklet that came with your vehicle
mileage, and coverage are mileage limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
conditional. Please read your accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicle’s original
warranty booklet for exact read your warranty booklet for tires are covered by their
information. details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda Canadian Owners
replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2012 warranty
materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
397
Reporting Safety Defects
In the US In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
should immediately inform the National Highway immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to inform Transport Canada.
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or become involved in individual problems between you,
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to information on reporting safety defects or about motor
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety.
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
398
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
Go online at www.helminc.com for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
Publication Form Description troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
Form Number in your vehicle.
61TM802 2012 Honda Insight Service Manual
61TM802EL 2012 Honda Insight Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
61TM830 2012 Model Series Honda Insight of damaged body parts.
Body Repair Manual
31TM8620 2012 Honda Insight Owner’s Manual
31TM8820 2012 Honda Insight
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31TM8M20 2012 Honda Insight Honda Service History
31TM8Q20 2012 Honda Insight Technology Reference Guide
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
399
400
Index
A Ambient Meter ................................. 72 Shift Lever Positions ................. 275

Antifreeze ....................................... 317 Shift Lock Release ..................... 277
Accessories..................................... 256 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 220
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Indicator ................................ 64, 289
Position) ...................................... 131 Operation .................................... 289 B
Accessory Power Socket .............. 157 Anti-theft, Audio System............... 221
Active Head Restraints ................. 144 Anti-theft Steering Column Battery
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 313 Lock ............................................. 131 Charging System
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 10, 25 Armrest ........................................... 146 Indicator............................ 63, 366
Airbags, Additional Information .... 25 Audio System ................................. 170 Jump Starting ............................. 360
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 Auto Door Locking ........................ 109 Maintenance ............................... 346
Advanced Airbag System ........... 30 Auto Door Unlocking .................... 110 Specifications ............................. 383
Airbag Service .............................. 36 Auto Idle Stop ................................. 283 Before Driving ............................... 245
How the Passenger Airbag Off Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 23 Belts, Seat ..................................... 9, 21
Indicator Works ....................... 35 Automatic Speed Control.............. 224 Beverage Holder ............................ 156
How the Side Airbag Off Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 273 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ........ 227
Indicator Works ....................... 34 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 382 Brakes
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34 Checking Fluid Level ................ 420 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 289
How Your Front Airbags Paddle Shifters in the Break-in, New Linings .............. 246
Work.......................................... 28 D Position ............................... 278 Bulb Replacement ..................... 332
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32 Paddle Shifters in the Fluid ............................................ 321
How Your Side Curtain Airbags S Position ................................ 281 Pad Wear Indicator.................... 288
Work.......................................... 33 Recommended Shift Points ...... 282 Parking ........................................ 151
INDEX
SRS Components ......................... 25 Shifting ........................................ 274 System Indicator ............ 63, 64, 368
Air Conditioning System ............... 164 Shift Lever Position
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 341 Indicators ................................ 273 CONTINUED
I
Index
Braking System.............................. 287 Certification Label ......................... 380 Crankcase Emissions Control
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 246 Chains ............................................. 314 System......................................... 389
Brightness Control, Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 351 Cruise Control Operation ............. 224
Instruments ................................ 124 Changing Oil Customer Service .......................... 396
Bulb Replacement How to ......................................... 314
Back-up Lights ........................... 329 When to....................................... 301 D
Brake Lights............................... 332 Charging System Indicator .... 63, 366
Front Side Marker Lights......... 328 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 264 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Front Turn Signal Lights .......... 327 Child Safety ...................................... 38 Dashboard .................................... 3, 60
Headlights .................................. 323 Child Seats Daytime Running Lights............... 123
Parking Lights ........................... 326 LATCH Anchor System .............. 47 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 398
Rear Turn Signal Lights ........... 329 Lower Anchor .............................. 47 Defogger, Rear Window ............... 126
Specifications ............................. 383 Tether Anchor ............................. 51 Defrosting the Windows....... 167, 168
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 323 Childproof Door Locks ................. 134 Dimensions ..................................... 382
Climate Control .............................. 164 Dimming the Headlights .............. 120
C Clock, Setting the .......................... 222 Dipstick
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 389 Automatic Transmission........... 320
Cargo Area Cover .......................... 153 Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 265 Engine Oil ................................... 251
Cargo Area Light ........................... 162 Compact Spare ............................... 350 Directional Signals......................... 120
Capacities Chart............................. 382 Console Compartment .................. 158 Disc Brake Pad Wear
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56 Controls, Instruments and .............. 59 Indicators .................................... 288
Carrying Cargo .............................. 258 Coolant Disc Player...................................... 190
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Adding ......................................... 317 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 316
Ceiling Light ................................... 161 Checking ..................................... 252
Center Pockets............................... 159 Proper Solution .......................... 317
Center Tray .................................... 158 Temperature Indicator................ 67
II
Index
Doors Low Oil Pressure Exhaust Fumes ................................ 56

Auto Door Locking .................... 109 Indicator............................ 62, 365 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Auto Door Unlocking ................ 110 Malfunction Indicator Belts by ......................................... 19
Childproof Door Locks ............. 134 Lamp ................................. 62, 367
Locking and Unlocking ............. 133 Overheated Engine ................... 362 F
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 384 Emergency Brake .......................... 151
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Emergency Flashers ..................... 125 Fan, Interior.................................... 166
Driving ............................................ 263 Emergency Hatch Opener............ 140 Features .......................................... 163
Economy ..................................... 253 Emergency Towing ....................... 376 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 247
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 334 Emissions Controls........................ 389 Filters
Emissions Testing ......................... 392 Dust and Pollen .......................... 334
E Engine Oil ................................................ 315
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 317 Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 125
Eco Assist System ......................... 266 Coolant Temperature Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 351
Eco Guide Feedback Monitor ........ 81 Indicator .................................... 67 Floor Mats ...................................... 333
ECON Button ................................. 124 If It Won’t Start .......................... 358 Fluids
ECON Mode ................................... 124 Malfunction Indicator Automatic Transmission........... 320
Economy, Fuel ............................... 253 Lamp ................................. 62, 367 Brake ........................................... 321
Emergencies on the Road............. 349 Oil Life Display .......................... 301 Windshield Washer ................... 319
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 360 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 365 FM Stereo Radio
Brake System Indicator ...... 63, 368 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 312 Reception .................................... 214
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 351 Overheating................................ 362 Four-way Flashers ......................... 125
Front Airbags ............................. 10, 25
INDEX
Charging System Specifications ............................. 382
Indicator............................ 63, 366 Speed Limiter ............................. 276
Checking the Fuses................... 371 Starting........................................ 265
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 389 CONTINUED
III
Index
Fuel .................................................. 246 H Ignition

Fill Door and Cap....................... 247 Keys............................................. 129
Gauge ............................................ 73 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 323 Switch .......................................... 131
Octane Requirement ................. 246 HandsFreeLink ............................ 227 Timing Control System ............. 390
Oxygenated ................................ 246 Hatch ............................................... 139 IMA System Power Flow
Reserve Indicator......................... 70 Opening....................................... 139 Monitor ......................................... 84
Tank, Filling the......................... 247 Open Indicator ............................. 68 Immobilizer System....................... 130
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 371 Hazard Warning Flashers............. 125 Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Headlights Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 62
G Aiming ......................................... 323 Indicators, Messages (MID) .... 62, 89
Daytime Running Lights .......... 123 ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 64
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 253 High Beam Indicator ................... 69 Auto Idle Stop............................... 66
Gasoline .......................................... 246 Reminder Beeper....................... 121 Brake (Parking and Brake
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 70 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 323 System) ............................. 63, 368
Gauge ............................................ 73 Turning on .................................. 121 Cruise Control .............................. 69
Octane Requirement ................. 246 Head Restraints ............................. 142 Cruise Main .................................. 69
Tank, Filling the......................... 247 Heated Mirrors .............................. 148 Door/Hatch Open ................. 12, 68
Gas Station Procedures................. 247 High Altitude, Starting at .............. 265 DRL (Daytime Running
Gauges High-Low Beam Switch ................ 120 Lights)..................................... 123
Charge/Assist .............................. 74 Hill Start Assist System ................ 297 EPS (Electric Power Steering) .. 68
Fuel ................................................ 73 Hood, Opening the ........................ 250 ECON Mode ................................. 71
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 273 Horn..................................................... 4 High Beam.................................... 69
Automatic Transmission........... 273 High Temperature (Coolant) ..... 67
Glove Box ....................................... 158 I IMA Battery Level ....................... 85
IMA System.................................. 66
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 380 Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 63
IV
Index
Indicators, Messages (MID) Inflation, Recommended Tire ...... 341 LATCH Anchorage System............ 47
Lights On ...................................... 69 Pressures .................................... 341 Lights
Low Fuel ....................................... 70 Information Display ......................... 72 Bulb Replacement ..................... 323
Low Oil Pressure ................. 62, 365 Inside Mirror .................................. 147 Indicator ........................................ 69
Low Temperature (Coolant) ...... 67 Inspection, Tire .............................. 341 Parking ........................................ 118
Low Tire Pressure/ Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Turn Signal ................................. 118
TPMS ................................ 66, 291 Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 124 Load Limits..................................... 259
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 367 Interior Lights ................................ 161 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 131
Security System ........................... 70 Introduction ......................................... i Locks
Side Airbag Off ............................ 65 iPod ................................................ 197 Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 131
Seat Belt .................................. 21, 62 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 248
SRS .......................................... 34, 64 J Hatch ........................................... 139
System Message .......................... 70 Power Door ................................ 133
TPMS .................................. 341, 342 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 353 Low Coolant Level ......................... 252
Turn Signal and Hazard Jack, Tire ........................................ 352 Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 70
Warning .................................... 69 Jump Starting ................................. 360 Lower Anchors................................. 47
12 Volt Battery Charging Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 365
System............................... 63, 366 K Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 382
VSA Off ......................................... 65
VSA System .................................. 65 Keys ................................................. 129
Infant Restraint ................................ 43
Infant Seats L
LATCH Anchorage System ....... 47
INDEX
Lower Anchors ............................ 47 Label, Certification ........................ 380
Tether Anchors............................ 51 Lane Change, Signaling ................ 121
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 17, 22 CONTINUED
V
Index
M Odometer .......................................... 79 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 286

Oil PGM-FI System.............................. 390
Maintenance ................................... 299 Change, How to ......................... 314 Playing the Radio ................... 171, 183
Main Items and Sub Items ....... 306 Change, When to ....................... 301 Playing a Disc ......................... 175, 190
Minder......................................... 301 Checking Engine ....................... 251 Playing an iPod ............................. 197
Owner’s Maintenance Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 365 Playing a USB Flash Memory
Checks .................................... 309 Selecting Proper Viscosity........ 313 Device ......................................... 204
Safety........................................... 300 ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 132 Pollen Filter .................................... 334
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 367 Onboard Refueling Vapor Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19
Meters, Gauges.......................... 61, 72 Recovery ..................................... 389 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 246 Outside Mirrors ............................. 147 Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Mirrors ............................................ 147 Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 80 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Adjusting..................................... 147 Overheating, Engine ..................... 362 Protecting Children ......................... 38
Heated ......................................... 148 Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 309 Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 240 Protecting Larger Children ........ 52
N Protecting Small Children .......... 44
P
Neutral Gear Position.................... 275 R
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 246 Paddle Shifters ............................... 278
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Panel Brightness Control ............. 124 Radiator Overheating .................... 362
Numbers, Identification ................ 380 Park Gear Position......................... 275 Radio/Disc/Sound System........... 170
Parking ............................................ 286 Radio Theft Protection.................. 221
O Parking Brake ................................ 151 Readiness Codes .................... 367, 392
Parking Brake and Brake Rear Lights, Bulb
Octane Requirement, System Indicator .................. 63, 368 Replacement ............................... 329
Gasoline .............................. 246, 296 Parking Lights................................ 120 Rear View Mirror........................... 147
VI
Index
Rear Window Defogger ................ 126 Safety Features .................................. 8 Shift Lock Release ......................... 277
Reclining the Seat-backs ............... 141 Airbags .......................................... 10 Side Airbags ............................... 10, 32
Recommended Shift Points .......... 282 Seat Belts ........................................ 9 Off Indicator ........................... 34, 65
Remote Audio Controls................. 219 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 57 Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 33
Remote Transmitter ...................... 135 Safety Messages ............................... iii Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement Information Seat Belts ...................................... 9, 21 Replacement ............................... 328
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 334 Additional Information ................ 21 Signaling Turns .............................. 121
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 314 Automatic Seat Belt Snow Tires ...................................... 344
Fuses ........................................... 371 Tensioners ................................ 23 Spare Tire
Light Bulbs ................................. 323 Cleaning ...................................... 333 Inflating ....................................... 350
Maintenance MinderTM.............. 301 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 17, 22 Specifications ............................. 383
Tires ............................................ 340 Maintenance......................... 24, 333 Specifications Charts..................... 382
Wiper Blades .............................. 337 Reminder Light and Speed Control ................................. 224
Replacing Seat Belts After a Beeper ................................. 21, 62 Speed-Sensitive Volume
Crash ............................................. 24 System Components.................... 21 Compensation (SVC) ................ 189
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 398 Use During Pregnancy................ 19 Spotlights ........................................ 161
Reserve Tank, Engine Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
Coolant ................................ 252, 317 Belt ...................................... 17, 22
Restraint, Child ................................ 38 Seats, Adjusting the ....................... 141
Reverse Gear Position................... 275 Security System ............................. 223
Rotation, Tire ................................. 343 Serial Number ................................ 380
Service Intervals ............................ 310
S Service Manual .............................. 399
INDEX
Service Station Procedures .......... 247
Safety Belts................................... 9, 21 Setting the Clock ........................... 222
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 398 Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 273 CONTINUED
VII
Index
SRS, Additional Information........... 25 Sun Visors ....................................... 160 Time, Setting the ........................... 222
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 Supplemental Restraint System Tire Chains ..................................... 344
Advanced Airbag System ........... 30 Servicing ....................................... 36 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 351
Airbag Service .............................. 36 SRS Indicator.......................... 34, 64 Tire Information ............................ 384
How the Passenger Airbag Off System Components.................... 25 Tire Labeling .................................. 385
Indicator Works ....................... 35 SVC .................................................. 189 Tire Pressure Monitoring
How the Side Airbag Off Synthetic Oil ................................... 313 System (TPMS) ............. 291, 387
Indicator Works ....................... 34 Check TPMS .............................. 387
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34 T Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
How Your Front Airbags Indicator............................ 66, 291
Work.......................................... 28 Taillights, Changing Required Federal
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32 Bulbs ........................................... 332 Explanation............................. 387
How Your Side Curtain Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 349 Tires ................................................ 340
Airbags Work ........................... 33 Technical Descriptions Air Pressure ............................... 341
SRS Components ......................... 25 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 384 Chains ......................................... 344
SRS Indicator.............................. 34, 64 Emissions Control Systems ...... 389 Checking Wear .......................... 342
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 131 Emissions Testing ..................... 392 Compact Spare ........................... 350
Starting the Engine........................ 265 Oxygenated Fuels...................... 246 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 384
In Cold Weather at High Three Way Catalytic Inflation ....................................... 340
Altitude ................................... 265 Converter ................................ 391 Inspection ................................... 341
With a Dead Battery ................. 360 Temperature Indicator .................... 67 Maintenance ............................... 342
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 362 Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51 Replacing .................................... 343
Steering Wheel Theft Protection............................. 221 Rotating....................................... 343
Adjustments ............................... 128 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 390 Service Life ................................. 342
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 131 Tighten Fuel
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 348 Cap Message .............................. 249
VIII
Index
Tires V Alignment and Balance ............. 342

Snow ............................................ 344 Cleaning ...................................... 345
Specifications ............................. 383 Vanity Mirror ................................. 160 Compact Spare ........................... 350
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 352 Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 259 Nut Wrench ................................ 352
Towing Vehicle Dimensions....................... 382 Windows
A Trailer ...................................... 298 Vehicle Identification Number..... 380 Auto Reverse .............................. 150
Emergency Towing ................... 376 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ) Operating the Power ................. 149
Transmission System..................................... 295 Rear, Defogger .......................... 167
Checking Fluid Level, VSA Activation Indicator .... 65, 295 Windshield
Automatic ............................... 320 VSA Off Switch .......................... 296 Cleaning ...................................... 119
Fluid Selection............................ 321 VSA System Indicator ......... 65, 295 Defroster .................................... 168
Identification Number............... 381 Vehicle Storage .............................. 348 Washers ...................................... 119
Shifting the Automatic .............. 274 Ventilation ...................................... 167 Wipers, Windshield
Treadwear ...................................... 342 VIN .................................................. 380 Changing Blades ........................ 334
Trip Meter ........................................ 79 Viscosity, Oil................................... 313 Operation .................................... 119
Turn Signals ................................... 121 Worn Tires ..................................... 341
W Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 376
U
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Unexpected, Taking Care Warning Labels, Location of .......... 57
of the ........................................... 349 Warranty Coverages ..................... 397
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 384 Washer, Windshield
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 246 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 319
INDEX
USB Adapter Cable ....................... 207 Operation .................................... 119
USB Flash Memory Device .......... 205 Wheels
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 316 Adjusting the Steering .............. 128
IX
11/08/27 15:22:56 31TM8620_417
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane (CVTF): Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
number of 87 or higher. Use Honda CVT Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
(continuously variable DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Fuel Tank Capacity: transmission fluid) only replacement (see page 371 ).
10.6 US gal (40 )
Fluid change capacity: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Recommended Engine Oil: 3.0 US qt (2.8 ) Front/Rear:
API Premium grade 0W-20 33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
detergent oil (see page 362 ).
Spare Tire:
Oil change capacity (including 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
filter):
3.4 US qt (3.2 )

2012 Honda Insight

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

2012 Honda Insight

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

2012 Insight

OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered a

ADDRESS This owner’s manual covers all models of the

DEALER NAME DEALER NO. The information and specifications included

Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in

Event Data Recorders

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3

Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 263

Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 379

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 399

Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.62) MULTI-INFORMATION HAZARD WARNING NAVIGATION SYSTEM＊2

Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

POWER DOOR LOCK

VEHICLE STABILITY PASSENGER AIRBAG

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

Driver and Passenger Safety

Restrain All Children Don’t Drink and Drive

Pay Appropriate Attention to the Keep Your Vehicle in Safe

Driver and Passenger Safety

Control Your Speed

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

Introduction 1.Close and Lock the Doors

Locking the doors reduces the

Driver and Passenger Safety

Locking the doors and the hatch also

Your vehicle has the auto door

The above example shows the front

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs Reclining a seat-back so that the

Driver and Passenger Safety

See page 141 for how to adjust the

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a

Passengers with adjustable seat-

4.Adjust the Head Restraints Properly adjusted head restraints

Adjust the driver’s head restraint so

Have passengers adjust their head

5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

If the seat belt touches or crosses

This spreads the forces of a crash

Driver and Passenger Safety

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Driver and Passenger Safety

If a front passenger does not fasten

Driver and Passenger Safety

To deactivate the lockable retractor, If the tensioner is activated, the SRS

Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

Honda provides a limited warranty

Airbag System Components

(9) (8) (2) (11)

Driver and Passenger Safety

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag

Two side curtain airbags, one for

Driver and Passenger Safety

An indicator on the instrument Emergency backup power in case

Although both airbags normally

This can happen if the severity of a

After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold

Driver and Passenger Safety